Energy Upstream

Kingdom® 2017
Project Management User Guide
July 2017
Trademarks and Copyright
This manual was produced by IHS Markit.
July 2017
.

1401 Enclave Pkwy Ste 500

Houston, Texas 77077
U.S.A.
Tel: (281) 531-4660
Fax: (832) 531-9966
Website: www.ihs.com/kingdom
Sales: [email protected]
Support: [email protected]
The following trademarks appear in this manual.

IHS Markit Kingdom® software and all of its components, AVOPAK, CGMPAK, GeoSyn®,
LoadPAK, PAKnotes®, Petra®, SynPAK®, Tunnel L+, Tunnel O, VelPAK®, VuPAK®,
Kingdom 1D Forward Modeling, Kingdom Colored Inversion, The Kingdom Company,
Kingdom Data Management, Kingdom DM Catalog Builder Kingdom Illuminator
Kingdom Seeker, and Kingdom I3D Scan are trademarks of IHS Markit.
Portions of data loading are copyrighted by Blue Marble Geographics.
Mapping API for the Spatial Explorer map provided by Esri ArcGIS Runtime SDK for .NET.
Kingdom Geophysics contains components under U.S. Patent Numbers 6,675,102,
8,265,876, and 9,105,075.
VuPAK® includes OpenInventor® and VolumeViz from FEI Visualization Sciences Group,
Inc. Some components or processes may be licensed under U.S. Patent Number 6,765,570.
Tunnel L+ includes OpenWorks® and SeisWorks® Development Kit from the Halliburton
Corporation.
Kingdom Connect and Tunnel O include OpenSpirit® FrameWork from OpenSpirit, a
TIBCO Software Group Company. Kingdom Data Management includes components from
OpenSpirit and are copyrighted by OpenSpirit, a TIBCO Software Group Company.
Kingdom Gateway plug-in for Petrel* E&P software platform uses the Ocean* software
development framework and * is a mark of Schlumberger.
Kingdom®1D Forward Modeling® includes software developed as part of the NPlot library
project available from: http://www.nplot.com/.
Portions of Kingdom® bitmap graphics are based on GD library by Boutell.Com, Inc. Further
information about the company can be found at www.boutell.com.
PAKnotes TIFF support is based in part on libtiff.

2017 Confidential iii

Rock Solid Attributes® is a registered trademark of Rock Solid Images Inc. and contains
confidential, proprietary, and trade secret information of Rock Solid Images Inc. Copyright©
Rock Solid Images Inc. All Rights reserved.
HDF5 (Hierarchical Data Format 5) Software Library and Utilities Copyright 2006-2015 by
The HDF Group. NCSA HDF5 (Hierarchical Data Format 5) Software Library and Utilities
Copyright 1998-2006 by the Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois.
VelPAK and Seismic Inversion are developed by Equipoise Software Ltd on behalf of IHS
Markit.
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Windows 7, Windows 8
operating systems, MS-DOS and SQL Server are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Oracle® Databases are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation.
OpenWorks, SeisWorks, Interpret 2000 and Interpret 2003 are registered trademarks of
Halliburton Corporation.
IHS Markit incorporates BMC® AppSight™ Black Box Technology in its software. BMC
Software, BMC Software logos and all other BMC Software product and service names are
registered trademarks or trademarks of BMC Software Inc. © 2009 BMC Software, Inc. All
rights reserved.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Copyright Notice
© 2011 - 2017 IHS Markit. For Internal use only. All rights reserved.
This manual contains confidential information and trade secrets proprietary to IHS Markit Ltd.
and its affiliated companies (“IHS Markit”). No portion of this manual may be reproduced,
reused, distributed, transmitted, transcribed or stored on any information retrieval system, or
translated into any foreign language or any computer language in any form or by any means
whatsoever without the express written permission of IHS Markit. For more information,
please contact Customer Care at [email protected].

Misuse Disclaimer
IHS Markit makes no representation or warranties of any kind (whether express or implied)
with respect to this manual or the Kingdom® software and to the extent permitted by law, IHS
Markit shall not be liable for any errors or omissions or any loss or damage or expense
incurred by an user. IHS Markit reserves the right to modify the Kingdom® software and any
of the associated user documentation at any time.

Acknowledgments
IHS Markit wishes to gratefully acknowledge the contributions of the many client software
testers in preparing the Kingdom® software. The enthusiastic Beta testers, smoke testers,
and staff greatly appreciate their invaluable feedback and contributions.

2017 Confidential
 Table of Contents

Project Management
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Kingdom Software Introduction

Kingdom applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Kingdom Geophysics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Kingdom Geology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
VuPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AVOPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Rock Solid Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SynPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1D Forward Modeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
GeoSyn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
GeoSyn 2D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
VelPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Seismic Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Kingdom Connect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Kingdom Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
LoadPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Getting Started with Kingdom

Launching the Kingdom Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
The Kingdom Software Start Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Recent Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Help Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Getting Started Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Author Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Select Project Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Opening a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
The Kingdom Software Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
The Base Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
The Vertical Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Kingdom Search, Sort, Filter, Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Advanced Search, Sort, and Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Projection Methods
Coordinate conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Datum and latitude/longitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. v

 Ellipsoids and Spheroids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
What is the Earth’s shape based on? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
What is Earth’s ‘real’ shape? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
WGS84 Geoid Heights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
What are Reference Ellipsoids?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
What are Spheroids? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Defining the project coordinate reference system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
US State Plane Zones: Exact Vs. Non-Exact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Selecting datum transformations (shifts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Setting default datum transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Creating custom coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Projection considerations for data import and export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Project Menu
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Display options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Project management options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Author (user) management and preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Licensing and software updates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
New Vertical Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Create New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Set General and Bound Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
View project details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Preferred Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Time-depth charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Project options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Level of Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Managing authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Creating a new author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Selecting authors to display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Editing author properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Selecting an author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Copying another author’s interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Deleting author(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Auto Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Base Map Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
General project options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Line Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fault System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Seismic Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Number Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Startup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Display Tool Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Display Features for Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. vi

 Well List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Wiggle options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
License Status/Feature Key maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Kingdom Base features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Open Session file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Save Session File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Delete Session File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Kingdom Project Security

Security overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Security access levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Security feature requirements and restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Set security permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Project Explorer
Using Project Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Navigating the Project Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Viewing project content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Viewing content from other authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Sorting the Project Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Searching the Project Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Understanding the Project Inventory and Custom Collections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Creating Custom Collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Digitizing On The Base Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Manually creating a collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Copying a collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Maintaining Custom Collections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Adding Items to a Custom Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Adding subfolders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Moving items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Removing items and subfolders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Deleting Collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Managing item properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Displaying items on the Base Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Maintaining the Project Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Legacy Work Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

The Kingdom Project Architecture

Project file types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Project data vs authored data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Modifying/Deleting Kingdom project files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
File ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
File references in the database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Color Names and Codes Table

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. vii

Troubleshooting Tips
Recording an Appsight log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Changing virus scan settings to optimize performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Know your workstation specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Disk Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Save or send your System Information log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Kingdom Software System Information Log Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Clean clock tampering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Kingdom Project Backups

What do I backup? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Backing up Kingdom Project Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Make a Single Project Manual Backup with DBAdmin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Restore a Kingdom project with DBAdmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Creating the backup script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Scheduling the backup with SQL Server Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

PAKnotes
Two parts of PAKnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
PAKnotes authorship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
PAKnote definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Types of PAKnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
PAKnote icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Object icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Other icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
PAKnote object coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
PAKnote Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Example 1 - Associate a Spreadsheet to a Horizon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Example 2 - Associate a website to a well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Example 3 - Associate a bitmap to a fault within a VSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Example 4 - Associate a document to a formation top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
PAKnote dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Creating PAKnotes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Associateing PAKnotes with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Linking PAKnotes to web (main menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Linking PAKnotes to web (right mouse button menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

viii © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Editing PAKnote properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Rename PAKnote. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Display PAKnotes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Copying PAKnote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Deleting PAKnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Creating PAKnote from File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
PAKnote tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Creating a PAKnote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Copying PAKnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
View PAKnotes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Update a PAKnote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Print PAKnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Delete a PAKnote. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Convert or delete a PAKnote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Printing and Plotting Options

Print setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Quick Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Presentation Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Select data extent to print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Base Map background color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Title Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Text attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
North Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Select Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Specify Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Color mixing in polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Print Existing RTL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Horizon Conversion
Horizon conversion from Pre-8.0 Kingdom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Tiled Horizons FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. ix

 Kingdom® 2017

Project Management
Overview
This section includes the following topics around creating, examining, and managing your
Kingdom projects:

Kingdom Software Kingdom Software is a complete geoscience solution package

Introduction that integrates the geological, geophysical, and engineering
capabilities needed for interpretation, evaluation, and asset
management.

Getting Started with Provides a basic workflow for creating a Kingdom project and
Kingdom links to many common Kingdom actions.

Projection Methods Includes general information about projection methods and

instructions on selecting a coordinate reference system for
your Kingdom projects, guidance on datum shifts when
converting coordinate systems, and data types that support
coordinate conversions during import and export.

Project Menu Describes the display options, Kingdom modules, project

management options, author (user) management and
preferences, and licensing and updates.

Kingdom Project Security Provides tools to manage permissions for Windows users in
your Kingdom projects. To use this feature your Kingdom
projects must have full SQL Server or Oracle databases.

The Kingdom Project Describes the most common Kingdom project file types.
Architecture

Project Explorer Displays all the data that can exist in a project. It is a complete
project inventory.

Troubleshooting Tips This section includes the following topics:

• Recording an Appsight log
• Changing virus scan settings to optimize performance
• Know your workstation specifications
• Database Connection Errors Database Administration.
• Clean clock tampering

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 1

 Kingdom Project Backups Describes project backup procedures for each of the possible
project databases.

PAKnotes Allows you to manage knowledge in your project by creating

embedded notes

Printing and Plotting Describes the Kingdom software print/plot features.

Options

Related topics
Database Administration
Data Import and Export by File
Well Explorer
Kingdom Data Management

2 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Kingdom Software Introduction
Kingdom applications
Kingdom Software is a complete geoscience solution package which allows simultaneous 2D
and/or 3D seismic interpretation and analysis along with synthetics, visualization, and 2D
modeling. Kingdom is structured to share its resources simultaneously in an integrated, multi-
user, multi-authored, networked 64-bit environment.
Kingdom Interpretation modules are available in Kingdom Core and Kingdom Advanced
versions:

Kingdom Core Supports the most common geoscience workflows.

Kingdom Advanced Includes geoscience tools for more complex geoscience workflows
and environments.

Interpretation modules

Kingdom Geophysics Includes geophyisical workflows such as processing seismic data,

interpreting horizons and faults, geosteering, fault attribute
generation, and trace calculations.

Kingdom Geology Includes geologic workflows such as petrophysical analysis, zone

creation and attribute calculations, reservoir analysis, digital and
raster log editing and interpretation.

VuPAK 3D interpretation and visualization for both geophysical and

geological interpretation.

All modules include Well Explorer, the well data management and interpretation module.
Some Well Explorer functionality requires a Kingdom Geology license.

Geophysics add-on modules

SynPAK Synthetic seismogram generation. SynPAK includes 1D Forward

Modeling (an interactive workflow that models seismic data as you
change geologic conditions and parameters that control the
seismic responses).

GeoSyn & GeoSyn 2D Improved synthetic seismogram generation

VelPAK Seismic time to depth velocity modeling

Seismic Inversion • SA Inversion combines log calibration, well seismic correlation,

wavelet estimation, macro-model building and inversion into a
single, interactive system.
• Colored Inversion is a robust method for quick-look inversion.

AVOPAK AVO interpretation and analysis

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 3

 Rock Solid Attributes Advanced 3D post-stack seismic attribute generation

Data Management and Data Exchange

Kingdom Connect (OpenSpirit application adapter)—designed for the interpreter in a

multi-vendor environment.

Direct Connect Import well and production data from the IHS web site directly into
Kingdom for use in your projects.

Tunnel O & Tunnel L+ Data exchange between Kingdom and other interpretation
platforms.

Kingdom Data Kingdom project and data management

Management

Kingdom Gateway IHS Kingdom Gateway plug-in for Petrel* software provides direct
connectivity between IHS Kingdom and Petrel software.

Kingdom Geophysics
With Geophysics base module, interpreters can generate horizons and faults on in-lines,
cross-lines and arbitrary lines. Horizons can be automatically tracked with newly improved
algorithms and combined with interpreted faults and fault polygons to produce seismic based
interpretation maps.
In addition, borehole and well log information can be displayed on seismic sections in time or
depth. Formation tops interpreted in wells can be projected on vertical seismic displays then
gridded and contoured over the project area. This geologic-based interpretation information
is seamlessly integrated with seismic interpretations to produce a cross discipline, risk-
reduced approach to oil and gas exploration.
Kingdom Advanced features in 2d3dPAK include the following:
• Dynamic Depth Conversion—Kingdom can perform depth conversion by creating
dynamic velocity models that you can use to quickly convert between time and depth for
grids, formation tops, wells, faults, and horizons. Kingdom builds dynamic velocity models
from existing data such as formation tops, time and depth surfaces, seismic velocities,
and control points.
• Advanced Horizon Autopicking—Kingdom’s advanced autopicking tools use an
innovative combination of patent pending technologies to pick horizons on both 2D and
3D seismic data in time or depth dos. Output horizons are calculated from seed points
that identify the event to be autopicked by location and seismic attribute.
• Fault Attributes—Fault Attributes are calculated 3D seismic attributes that greatly
enhance the fault picking workflow by improving visibility of stratigraphic features in your
seismic data. Fault attributes can be calculated on both time and depth volumes.
• Surface Curvature (Geophysics and Geology base module)—Curvature attributes
indicate the rate of change of surface topology and accent features such as faults,
fracture systems, and paleo-topography. Eleven curvature attributes represent different

4 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 vertical slices through a best-fit quadrature surface calculated with groups of nine
traces.These attributes are available through the Extended Math Calculator with a
Kingdom Advanced license where you can make curvature calculations on interpreted
surfaces.
• Kingdom Project Security (Geophysics and Geology base module)—The Security feature
allows you to manage permissions for Windows users in your Kingdom projects. You can
restrict a user to single or multiple authors within a project.
The Security feature:
- is only available to Kingdom projects with Oracle or SQL Server databases.
- is NOT available for Kingdom projects with Access or SQL Server Express
databases.

Kingdom Geology
Geology base module is a geological interpretation and field management tool that merges
the worlds of geology and geophysics to create a platform for conducting geological
operations on any scale from regional studies to detailed reservoir characterization. It is
tightly integrated with the seismic interpretation of Geophysics base module, but can also
function as a standalone geological application.
Kingdom Advanced features in Geology module include the following:
Reserves—Kingdom’s Advanced Reserves package provides the necessary tools to
estimate reserves, forecast product stream, and make economic forecasts to optimize
field management and investment decisions.
• Geosteering (geological information for logs)—provides tools to correlate geological
information (Logging While Drilling or LWD logs) gathered from a drilling well with
information from the selected reference well to accurately guide the path of drilling
according to your well plan.
• Surface Curvature (Geophysics and Geology)—Curvature attributes indicate the rate of
change of surface topology and accent features such as faults, fracture systems, and
paleo-topography. Eleven curvature attributes represent different vertical slices through a
best-fit quadrature surface calculated with groups of nine traces.These attributes are
available through the Extended Math Calculator with a Kingdom Advanced license where
you can make curvature calculations on interpreted surfaces.

VuPAK
VuPAK is an interactive 3D-visualization tool for the Windows platform. It integrates the
viewing of culture data, horizon data, fault data, grid data, well data, 2D seismic and geologic
data, and 3D seismic data in a 3D framework. The tool is linked to seismic data files.
VuPAK Advanced’s Microseismic Analysis module provides the necessary tools to import,
view, display, and analyze microseismic data in an integrated interpretation environment. The
VuPAK Advanced Microseismic module provides the necessary tools to import, view, display,
and analyze microseismic data in an integrated interpretation environment. Dynamic filtering
and sub-setting of the microseismic point sets in a 3D crossplot allows you to isolate
lineations and define fracture patterns resulting from reservoir treatments, and consequently
optimize and enhance recovery operations.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 5

AVOPAK
AVO (amplitude variation with offset) analysis is the detailed study of pre-stack seismic data
responses to detect changes in lithology and fluid content in subsurface volumes of rock.
Changes in lithology and fluids within a rock volume can point directly to the presence of
hydrocarbons in specific areas of the rock volume. AVOPAK comprises separate functions
that combine to generate attributes, which can enable you to locate direct hydrocarbon
indicators in rock volumes.
AVOPAK strives to provide an AVO interpretation package that is totally integrated with all
Kingdom applications. The ability to interpret pre-stack data (gathers, AVO attributes, and
various crossplots), and integrate results with conventional interpretation applications
provides you with functionality that should help reduce risk in prospecting for oil and gas.

Rock Solid Attributes

Rock Solid Attributes computes and outputs numerous physical and geometric attributes
from seismic data. You can generate as many as 54 advanced 2D and 3D post-stack seismic
attributes, including similarity and spectral decomposition. Usage of these attributes can
improve the interpretability of seismic data from both the structural and stratigraphic points of
view. The list of attributes output by Rock Solid Attributes is extensive and each one can be
illuminating to a specific feature in the sub surface.

SynPAK
SynPAK is a full-featured package that helps streamline the process of synthetic seismogram
generation. SynPAK gives you access to statistical and theoretical wavelet generation, well
log editing and log conversion routines. Compare your log data to seismic data using cross-
plot displays or match the synthetic to seismic data with stretch/squeeze routines. SynPAK is
tightly integrated with Geophysics module.
SynPAK also includes the 1D Forward Modeling functionality.

1D Forward Modeling
1D Forward Modeling is available with a SynPAK license.
1D Forward Modeling provides an interactive workflow that models seismic data as you
change geologic conditions and parameters that control the seismic responses. This provides
a comparison of real seismic data to synthetic seismic data in such a way as to infer geology
from characteristics observed in the real data. You can iteratively change the model and test
ideas in real time to facilitate a sufficient match with the real data so that the model is a
possible representation of the geologic conditions that produced the real seismic data.

GeoSyn
With GeoSyn you can create one-dimensional and offset synthetic models, including zero-
offset, multi-offset, derived, and blocked log models as well as gather panels and filter panels.
GeoSyn has an improved display of synthetics, offers several methods for tying wells to
seismic data, and is faster and easier to use than SynPAK. GeoSyn also gives you the ability
to edit and clean up your well logs. For more information about GeoSyn, refer to the online
GeoSyn documentation.

6 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

GeoSyn 2D
GeoSyn 2D is a two-dimensional seismic modeling program designed to quickly and
iteratively turn cross section depth models into pseudo seismic sections.
GeoSyn 2D consists of two pages: a depth page where you place logs and define zones to
capture velocity fields, and a time page that's automatically generated from the depth page
after you define a zone that horizontally spans the entire cross section. The time page shows
the depth page in time.
Modify zones and log readings on the depth page to affect the time model and ultimately
develop likely geologic scenarios. For more information about GeoSyn, refer to the online
GeoSyn 2D documentation.

VelPAK
VelPAK is an effective tool for constructing velocity models predicting depth from seismic
time. VelPAK allows both quick-look depth conversion which requires minimum user
interaction, as well as design of detailed velocity model workflows. You can save the
workflows to use on the same areas in repetitive analysis.

Seismic Inversion
Seismic inversion is the process of transforming observed seismic reflectivity and measured
well data into a quantitative description of the subsurface. The output of the seismic inversion
is typically either acoustic or shear impedance or even density.

Colored Inversion
Colored Inversion is a robust and fast seismic inversion for interpreters. By incorporating well
acoustic impedance, Colored Inversion generates a relative acoustic impedance from a
seismic volume that matches the character of the well data, giving the interpeter confidence
that the events being picked represent true changes in rock lithology. Refer to your
installation directory for the Colored Inversion user guide PDF and online help.

SA (Simulated Annealing) Inversion

Simulated Annealing Inversion is a model driven inversion to high resolution absolute and
relative acoustic impedance.The Simulated Annealing method is a robust and proven global
optimization algorithm to derive the layered impedance models via a stochastic search of the
model space. The output absolute impedance may be used for enhanced interpretation of
responses within layers, reservoir characterisation and quantification. The relative acoustic
impedance output is ideal for more confident interpretation of real rock boundaries. Refer to
your installation directory for the SA Inversion user guide PDF and online help.

Kingdom Connect
Kingdom Connect is an OpenSpirit application adapter that provides the connectivity
environment for cross-discipline collaboration and optimal, immediate data access.Once the
OpenSpirit server and client have been installed and user accounts have been created for the
server, Kingdom Connect is ready to go. No additional configuration is required.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 7

Kingdom Connect is designed for the interpreter and enables movement of data between
applications on the desktop. Interpreters can send data to other applications using drag and
drop from the Kingdom tree. Data received by Kingdom Connect will be loaded into Kingdom
for immediate use.

Kingdom Data Management

Kingdom Data Management includes the following tools for project and data management:
• Catalog Builder—is used to locate and retrieve metadata from Kingdom projects in
various directory locations on a local or wide area network.You have a choice of
searching an entire network, a particular machine, or a set of directories for Kingdom
projects. After projects are located, they are inventoried and placed into the Catalog
Builder database.
• Kingdom Data Manager—is used to view, manage, and transfer data between Kingdom
projects stored on various directory locations, local or network, and in various database
types.

LoadPAK
LoadPAK is designed for loading and displaying data. Interpretation tools are not available
with a LoadPAK license.

8 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Kingdom® 2017

Getting Started with Kingdom

This book includes the following topics:
• Launching the Kingdom Software
• The Kingdom Software Start Page
• Help Center
• Getting Started Workflow
• Creating a New Project
• Opening a Project
• The Kingdom Software Windows
• Kingdom Search, Sort, Filter, Select
Launching the Kingdom Software

Launching the Kingdom Software

To open Kingdom from the Microsoft Windows desktop choose Start > All Programs > IHS
Kingdom [version#] > The Kingdom Software [version#], or double-click the Kingdom
icon on the Microsoft Windows desktop. The Kingdom Software Start Page opens.
If you are launching the software for the first time, you will be prompted to do one of the
following:
• Update the license file —if you have a standalone license and the sentinel is plugged
in. Click Yes to install your feature keys.
• Install the Sentinel plug or use a network license —if no sentinel is plugged into your
workstation. This would include workstations on a network license. If you are on a
network license, click Yes. If you have a standalone sentinel, plug it into the appropriate
port on your computer and launch the software again.
See the Installation Guide for details.

10 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 The Kingdom Software Start Page

The Kingdom Software Start Page

The Kingdom Software Start Page provides convenient links to open or create a Kingdom
project, help you get started, and tools to help you manage your Kingdom software, Kingdom
projects, and user account.
Kingdom has two versions, Kingdom Core, and Kingdom Advanced. Your Start Page options
are the same for both versions:

The Start Page contains three sections with links to common activities:
• Recent Projects
• Getting Started
• Tools

Recent Projects
The Recent Projects section displays the name and path of recently used projects and
provides options to open an existing project or create a new project.
• Creating a New Project—specify the following for your new project: name and file
location; database type (SQL Server, SQL Server Express, or Oracle); project options
(bounds, units, and datum elevation); XY coordinate system.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 11

The Kingdom Software Start Page

• Opening a Project—open a project using the standard Windows File Open dialog box.
Locate the path and directory for the existing project then click Open to complete the
task. The project name is displayed in the title bar and the Project Tree and base map
are displayed.
The following are shortcut keys for projects.
• Ctrl+N—create new project
• Ctrl+O—open new project
• Ctrl+S—save new project.

Getting Started
The Getting Started section provides links to the following:
• What’s New—opens a PDF document that describes the new features included in the
current release.
• Help Center—provides links to available Help topics. Both local and web help is available.
• List of Kingdom Shortcut Keys—a list of the various Kingdom software keyboard
shortcuts.
• Videos—takes you to the Kingdom Video Library on the IHS Kingdom website. You will
need your user name and password to log in.

Tools
The Tools section provides links to the following frequently used actions:
• My Account—opens the My Account Login page on the IHS Kingdom website. Download
releases and updates, search the Knowledge Base, and access Support items.
• Update The Kingdom Software—download software updates (service packs and hot
fixes) from the IHS Kingdom website.
• Migrate Access Project—when you open a Kingdom project with an Access database,
you will be prompted to migrate your project database.
• Manage Manual SQL Server Express Projects—SQL Server Express projects can be
automatically portable or have the manual configuration. The Manual SQL Server
Express Management tool provides two main functions:
- detach or attach Kingdom projects using the manual SQL Server Express
configuration;
- open a project with the auto portability configuration in Kingdom 8.5 Release or earlier
by changing the project to the manual portability configuration using the Make a
Project Portable option.
• License Status/Feature Key Maintenance—view available Kingdom applications as per
your current standalone or network license. If you have a standalone license, select
License Status to update feature keys. See License Requirements and Management for
instructions on obtaining and installing feature keys.
• User Preferences—specify variable settings for faults, horizons, and wells. These
settings are applied throughout the project.

12 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Help Center

Help Center
The Kingdom Help Center provides links to online web help, or the local help files. On the
Kingdom Start Page, click the Help Center link under the Getting Started section. The Help
Center window opens as shown below.

Note: When you access the Help Center for the first time and you have not selected the
local help, you will be required to log in using your My Account information.

Help Center Window

The Kingdom web help is divided into three categories: Geoscience Modules, Management
and Other Resources. Click any book name to display it in the window.
When you open any online book the following options are available:
• Search tab—search for a specific topic in Kingdom help.
• Favorites tab—add the topic currently open to your list of favorites.
• Hide/Show icon—is a toggle that allows you to hide the top part of the Help Center and
display the online help in the full window.
• Search Knowledge Base and Videos — search white papers and articles in the
technical support knowledge base.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 13

Help Center

• —Select Online for the web based help and Local to view the help on
your computer.

14 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Getting Started Workflow

Getting Started Workflow

1. Create New Project

2. Select location for project and enter project name

3. Enter author name

4. Select project database

Oracle SQL Server SQL Server Auto SQL Server Manual SQL
Single Multiple Express Server Express

5. Select project options

Define projection from the 6. Select project Define projection from

Project Coordinate coordinate system another project. Navigate
System dialog box. to source project .tks file.

7. Project opens

8. Specify user preferences

(Project > User Preferences)

9. Download / import the desired data.

Importing options include downloading from the IHS Enerdeq data store using
Direct Connect and importing by file. Kingdom supports both fixed format files such as
the IHSEnergy 297 format and custom columnar files.

10. Author Management

• Create authors for Interpretation
• Select author to begin Interpretation

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 15

Creating a New Project

Creating a New Project

To create a Kingdom project, follow these steps:
1. Launch Kingdom. From the Microsoft Windows desktop select Start > All Programs >
IHS Kingdom > Kingdom Software [version#] (64-bit), or double-click the Kingdom
icon.
2. Select Create Project from the The Kingdom Software Start Page.
Alternatively, from within a Kingdom project, select Project > Create New Project.
3. Navigate to the desired project file location, enter a project name and click Create.
4. Enter an Author Name for the creating author. Interpreting authors will be created later.

Tip: Kingdom does not create a folder for the first author of a new project. All interpretations
for the first author are saved in the main project folder. The creating author should not
be a working author. As subsequent authors are created, a subfolder is also created.
Each author’s interpretations will be saved in his or her subfolder.

5. Select Project Database—Kingdom supports SQL Server, SQL Server Express and
Oracle.
6. Define the Project Options—surface units, seismic datum elevation, seismic grid
increments for the base map, and project bounds.
7. Define the Projection system of your project. You can choose to use the projection system
from another project or select the projection in the Project Coordinate System dialog box.
See Projection
8. Import seismic, well, and culture data. See Data Import and Export.

Note: If the user has been assigned restricted user privileges through the Security
feature, the Create Project option will be disabled for that user. The Kingdom
Security feature is available with a Kingdom Advanced license, and is disabled by
default.

Author Name
After you have named your project and specified a location for your project folder, enter a
name for the creating author (or for subsequent interpreters if you have already created the
project).
When creating a new project, enter a high level or generic name like Project Manager or
your company or work group name. This author will not have its own folder for
interpretation files in the project directory.
Authors created after the initial project creation are assigned unique folders to hold
interpretation files. The initial author’s files will be placed directly in the project directory, so
that author should not be used for routine interpretation, but only for the importing of non-
authored data like wells and seismic.

16 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Creating a New Project

Select Project Database

Note: You must select a Project Database each time you create a new project.

The database for your Kingdom project can be in SQL Server (Single), SQL Server (Multiple),
SQL Server Express, or Oracle. See Database Administration for more information on your
database options.
The Select Project Database dialog box lists the available databases for the new project.
Select the desired database and click OK to open the Project Options dialog box to continue
the process of creating your project.
Both MS SQL Server and Oracle Project Manager will require you to have a client application
installed on your computer. You will also need to get a username and password from your
database administrator. You do not require a username and password for either SQL Server
Express option.

Related topics
Choosing a Database
SQL Server Express Database
SQL Server Database
Oracle Database

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 17

Opening a Project

Opening a Project
To open a project, use the following steps:
1. Choose Project > Open Project from the menu bar or click Open Project on the
Kingdom Software Start Page.

Note: If the project you are trying to open is currently locked by Kingdom Data
Management, you will get a message and will be unable to open the project until
the data management process is complete.

2. Navigate to the project folder containing the Kingdom project and double-click
<Project>.tks.
Alternatively, using the Windows Explorer, locate the project folder. Locate the
project’s.tks file then double-click it to open.
3. Select the author and click OK to open the Kingdom main window, or click Create to open
the Create tab in Author Management. Enter the author name, specify the directory where
the author’s interpretations will be saved and click OK to open the Kingdom main window.

Tip: Kingdom does not create a folder for the first author of a new project. All interpretations
for the first author are saved in the main project folder. The creating author should not
be a working author. If you are the first author to open a project, create a folder for your
interpretations. Each author’s interpretations will be saved in their subfolder.

Menus in The Kingdom Software Windows are dynamic and change according to the active
(selected) window. When the base map is active, the menu item displayed on the far left of
the main menu bar is Map and the other items on the main menu bar relate to the base map.
When the Project Tree is the active window, the menu item displayed on the far left of the
main menu bar is Explore, and other menu items on the main menu bar relate to the Project
Tree.

18 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 The Kingdom Software Windows

The Kingdom Software Windows

The Kingdom software contains one parent window, The Application Window, and three child
windows: The Project Tree, The Base Map, and the Vertical Display. The Kingdom Software
window is always open. Within the Kingdom software window, the Project Tree is also active.
Any number of base maps and VSDs can also be opened. Each child window can be shaped
individually, maximized, or minimized.

The Application Window

The parent Kingdom software Application window includes a large workspace for displaying
the child windows. The pull down menus contain all the commands for each of the three child
window types. The Kingdom software window’s title bar and pull down menus are context-
sensitive; they will change depending on whether the Project Tree, base map, or a vertical
display (section) is active.

Note: Cascade or Tile Windows: This option is very useful if the windows within your
Kingdom session have become disorderly or obstructed from view. Choosing the
Windows > Cascade or Windows > Tiled option arranges all of the windows
opened in the Kingdom session in a cascaded or tiled form at the upper left corner
of Kingdom session. Iconed windows may remain as such at the bottom of the
Kingdom session window or may open as cascaded windows in the Kingdom
session; this is determined by your operating systems window settings.

The Base Map

Base maps are used to display combinations of well, culture, and interpreted data (horizons,
faults, and grids). Base maps may only have one contour and one type of interpreted data
displayed at a time. However, you can display numerous culture layers, polygons, surveys,
and wells.
Surveys, wells, polygons, and culture can be displayed as overlays on the base map. Well
symbols and deviation surveys may be posted and labeled along all deviation and side
tracks. Well information may be accessed and edited by double-clicking the well from the
base map.
Culture data is organized into layers which can be turned off or on from the Project Tree and
edited on a base map.
Display horizons, grids, faults, slices, and contours in both color raster and overlay format. In
the color raster format, the data appears as opaque color. Everything else (wells, culture,
survey and contour data) is posted on top of the raster image. Interpretive data can also be
used to generate contour overlays. A base map can have several contour line maps visible at
any one time.
Data interpretation that can be conducted in base map include the following:
• Auto-picking, smoothing, and erasing horizons
• Digitizing, assigning, and unassigning faults and fault polygons
• Creating and modifying contours
• Digitizing planimeter polygons.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 19

The Kingdom Software Windows

• If a time slice is displayed as the color raster, fault lines can be digitized and edited.

Note: A base map can have only one data attribute set as the color raster, but may have
multiple contour overlays.

A status bar across the bottom of the base map displays the current position of the cursor in
XY survey coordinates and inline / crossline numbers.
From a base map, you can open a vertical display, which is used to view well data and
interpret horizons and faults. See The Vertical Display.

Related topics
Opening a Base Map
Displaying Items on a Base Map
Saving, Opening, and Copying Base Maps
Keyboard Shortcuts

Opening a Base Map

Whenever a project is opened, two windows are automatically displayed: Project Explorer, a
tree-view inventory of data in your project, and a base map.
You can open additional base maps or a new base map using one of the following methods:
• From the Kingdom main window menu bar, choose Project > New Base Map. A new
base map appears. The items selected in the Project Tree appear on the base map.
• From the Project Tree, double-click a contour, fault, grid, or horizon to open a new base
map displaying the selected data.

Displaying Items on a Base Map

Note: If the items do not display on the base map, make sure that the top-level folder for that
category is checked.

You can display items on a base map using one of the following methods:
• click the item in Project Explorer, such as the name of a well
• drag the item from Project Explorer to the base map, such as a horizon
• Vertical displays or sections allows you to view and interpret seismic and well data.

The Vertical Display

There are 2 types of vertical displays: vertical seismic displays (VSDs) and geologic sections
(cross sections and correlation sections).
Vertical Seismic Displays (VSDs) are simply inlines, crosslines, 2D lines, or arbitrary lines
viewed in a vertical plane. Seismic trace data can be displayed in a variety of formats. Often,
they are displayed in a color raster format. Horizon, grid, well, and fault data can be projected
on demand. You can spend much time opening, closing and re-positioning vertical views
during the process of interpreting faults and horizons.

20 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 The Kingdom Software Windows

Vertical displays, both seismic and geologic, can be saved as templates. See Lines - VSD’s
and Cross Sections.
Vertical slices can be rolled at set increments to facilitate horizon and fault interpretation.
They also can be dynamically repositioned from base maps and other VSDs. You can have
an infinite number of VSDs open at one time.
Across the bottom of the VSD is a status bar that displays the time of the cursor position and
the value of the seismic amplitude at that particular point. VSDs are used to open and
reposition time slices and other vertical slices. Also, VSDs can span different surveys
provided there is some overlap.

Related topics
Opening a Vertical Seismic Display
Moving Around in a VSD
Line Menu: VSD’s and Cross Sections
Keyboard Shortcuts

Opening a Vertical Seismic Display

You can open a vertical display using one of the following methods:
• From the Kingdom main menu bar, choose Project > New Vertical Display. Choose any
inline, crossline, or named arbitrary line within that survey.
• Right-click the base map and digitize an arbitrary line. After you digitize an arbitrary line,
the VSD opens.
• To open a VSD from the Project Tree, double-click a survey listed in the Surveys
subdirectory. If the selected survey is a 2D line, it will automatically be displayed. If the
selected survey is a 3D survey, the Select Vertical Display Dialog Box opens. Choose any
inline, crossline, or named arbitrary line within that survey. You can select a line from a
seismic or select a line from a well.
• To open a VSD from a VSD, right click and choose Display Crossline, Display Time
Slice, or Digitize Arbitrary Line.

Moving Around in a VSD

See Keyboard Shortcuts for a list of available Kingdom Hotkeys for interpreting in vertical
seismic display.

Note: This feature is available with a Geophysics main module license.

Use the vertical and horizontal arrow keys when incrementing through 3D seismic displays.
• For vertical and horizontal section displays, the arrow keys move as follows:
- Left arrow key—move one vertical line to the left.
- Right arrow key—move one vertical line to the right.
- Up arrow key—moves one slice up.
- Down arrow key—moves one slice down.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 21

The Kingdom Software Windows

• For line and crossline displays, the arrow keys move in the context of the direction of the
line.
• For the four ambiguous cases, such as pressing for a slice, is equivalent to down and is
equivalent to up.
• For an arbitrary line, the arrow keys translate the entire arbitrary line as follows:
- Left arrow key—move the arbitrary line to the left.
- Right arrow key—move the arbitrary line to the right.
- Up arrow key—move the arbitrary line up.
- Down arrow key—move the arbitrary line down.

22 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Kingdom Search, Sort, Filter, Select

Kingdom Search, Sort, Filter, Select

Kingdom has a variety of search, sort, filter, and select functionality ranging from very basic to
the more advanced options.

Search and Filter Options

For many of the search fields, the search is by the starting character in the list of terms. The
wild card is the asterisk. The older search fields require the entire search term entered.The
more recent search field will return all terms that start with the entered character(s).

Search Functionality in Kingdom

Enter the search string and click Filter. The

list will filter down to those terms with the
entered string at the beginning of the term.

The first term starting with the entered string

is highlighted for easy selection.

Dynamic filter by the entered string. The

search string is not restricted to the starting
characters and will match the entered string
anywhere in the term.

Advanced Search, Sort, and Filter Most applications developed in Kingdom 8.6
and later have this advanced functionality.

Select Options
When selecting items in a list, the following options are available:
• To highlight sequential items, hold down SHIFT and click the first item. With SHIFT still
held down, click the final item to be selected. All items between the first and final will be
selected.
• Another way to select sequential items is to select the first item, then hold the left mouse
button down and drag the cursor to the final item.
• To highlight individual item, hold down Ctrl and select each item.

Advanced Search, Sort, and Filter

The search, sort, and filter options apply to all data types.

Search Options
All data types have a search option. Enter a string into the Search field. The list will
dynamically update.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 23

Kingdom Search, Sort, Filter, Select

Click OK to add all displayed objects to the selected layer (wells and surveys) or to create a
separate layer for each object (grids, faults).

Sort Options
In a populated spreadsheet, click the header for any data item to sort the data in ascending
order by that item. Click the header again to sort in descending order. The default sort field is
name as displayed in the Project Tree.

Filter Options
Filter the data in the data grid by specific criteria. Click the filter icon beside a data item
header.

Select All or enter multi-level

filter criteria.

• Filter the data objects by adding Show only criteria. Enter an alphanumeric string and
select the filter option. Available filter options are the following:

24 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Kingdom Search, Sort, Filter, Select

- Equal to
- Not equal to
- Starts with
- Contains
- Does not contain
- Ends with
• Click the match case button to narrow the search.
• Add an additional filter and select And or Or as the operator.
• Click Filter. The resulting list of data objects will be displayed.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 25

Kingdom Search, Sort, Filter, Select

26 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Projection Methods
A projection system is a mathematical method for converting spherical coordinates (lat/longs)
to plane coordinates (XYs) and is necessary to create maps. All map projections distort the
surface in some way. Depending on the purpose of the map, some distortions are acceptable
and others are not; therefore different map projections exist in order to preserve some
properties of the sphere-like body at the expense of other properties.

Note: For complete information on projection systems, please refer to www.epsg.org

Why is the coordinate reference system (CRS) important?

A coordinate reference system (CRS) is used to properly represent data on the surface of the
earth. Kingdom uses coordinate reference systems to allow users to determine correct spatial
relations of well and seismic data which are then used in daily interpretation and well
planning work flows.
Specific workflows around projection methods are the following:
Defining the project coordinate reference system
Selecting datum transformations (shifts)
Setting default datum transformations
Creating custom coordinate systems
Projection considerations for data import and export

What is a CRS?
A coordinate system defines the location of a point on a planar or spherical surface. The
components of a coordinate system for Earth measurements are:
• The Projection System, or Map Projection.
• The Linear Units
• The Datum
• Ellipsoids

The linear units

There are three standards for linear units (metric, International feet and US feet) used to
measure the geodesic distance between points on the earth’s surface. To maximize accuracy
and avoid miscalculations, you must use the same linear unit throughout a project for all
surface measurements.

The datum
A geodetic datum (plural datums, not data) is a reference from which measurements are
made. In surveying and geodesy, a datum is a set of reference points on the Earth's surface
against which position measurements are made and (often) an associated model of the

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 27

shape of the earth (reference ellipsoid) to define a geodetic coordinate system. Horizontal
datums are used for describing a point on the earth's surface in latitude and longitude.

Related topics
Coordinate conversion
Datum and latitude/longitude
Ellipsoids and Spheroids

28 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Coordinate conversion

Coordinate conversion
A projection system converts, in a consistent way, measurements on a datum to a flat
surface. A datum is a mathematical surface on which field measurements can be replicated.
Field measurements transferred directly to paper cannot be reconciled; angles differ from
field readings and lines that converged to a point in the field now intersect or fail to meet
when drawn on paper. See Datum and latitude/longitude for further information.

Note: The most commonly used Datums relate an ellipsoid to the WGS84 ellipsoid. Each
datum differs from others in the choice of ellipsoid and its relation to WGS84.

Field measurements cans usually be replicated on an ellipsoid. Unfortunately, a section of an

ellipsoidal shell cannot be folded and carried in the glove box of a car. It would be awkward to
send through the mail or carry on a hike. The survey crew would be hard pressed to use it in
the field. As a physical model, we could afford to construct and use only a few of these, for
display at the Bureau of Standards, in science museums, and the like.
Even though the measurements cannot be accurately plotted on a sheet of paper, they must
be plotted on a sheet of paper to be useful. This is done by systematically distorting the
measurements. Systematic distortion using mathematical equations allows measurement
and control of the distortion. This is the purpose of projection systems. With the right math
we can insure that the angles measured on the ground match those measured on paper.
Projection systems are most easily dealt with in terms of their effect on the latitude-longitude
grid, which is known as a graticule.
Imagine a glass sphere with the graticule drawn on it. A light bulb in the center of this sphere
will project the grid onto wallpaper. Wallpaper, being a flat surface, can be folded and
transported easily. There will be more distortion near the ceiling than lower on the wall, but
the representation will be flat and the distortion will be mathematically known.
To reduce distortion toward the ceiling, the projection could be on a cone of paper resting on
the sphere. Distortion will be less toward the North Pole and greater toward the equator. The
cone can be unrolled and, like wallpaper, folded for practical use. Projection to wallpaper is
one type of map projection, and projection to a cone is another. There are hundreds of
projection systems, of which something like 30 are commonly used.
In summary, the projection system is how the datum representation is converted to a flat
surface for practical application. Each projection has its own variation of distortion of the
original data. You cannot graphically represent Earth measurements on paper exactly, but
you do have some choice in the distortion. One rule is generally applicable: it is easier to
minimize distortion for smaller areas than for larger areas. Every governmental entity decides
which datum and projection system best serves its needs, and this usually determines the
datum and projection to be used in hydrocarbon exploration.
Each 3D seismic survey is shot and processed to match a grid in some coordinate system. If
bins are plotted using a different projection system, bins will no longer fall in a strict grid
pattern but will appear to be in a grid pattern with linear distortion, that is, as if the scale were
changing across the survey. This introduces complications when combining grids shot in
different State Plane zones, for example. Interpretation is not severely affected, but well
locations must be tied to bins as located in the original coordinate grid. The lat/long

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 29

Coordinate conversion

coordinates on the map are not to be relied upon unless the bin in question was originally
processed in the coordinate system used to make the map.

30 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Datum and latitude/longitude

Datum and latitude/longitude

What is a datum?
A datum is a mathematical surface, such as a sphere or spheroid (which is the same as an
ellipsoid) on which field measurements can be replicated. A Datum is required for all lat/long
coordinates. A datum consists of:
The shape of the Earth, usually an ellipsoid, and
The datum method. The method gives the mathematical orientation of the ellipsoid relative to
a satellite-based datum known as WGS84. The method may require a single offset or several
offsets, and it may require rotation. Blue Marble, and therefore Kingdom, supports six datum
methods.
Geodetic datums define the shape of the Earth and the orientation of the coordinate system
used to map the Earth. Datums have evolved from those describing the spherical Earth to
ellipsoidal models derived from satellite measurements. True geodetic datums were
employed only after the late 1700s when measurements showed that the Earth was
ellipsoidal in shape.
Referencing geodetic coordinates to the wrong datum can result in position errors of
hundreds of units. Different nations and agencies use different datums based on coordinate
systems used to identify positions in geographic information systems (GIS), precise
positioning systems, and navigation systems.
The diversity of datums in use today and the technological advancements that have made
possible global positioning measurements with sub-meter accuracies requires careful datum
selection and careful conversion between coordinates of different datums.
To understand the concept of a datum, imagine you making a map in Texas of the area
included in the triangle bounded by Houston, Dallas, and San Angelo. One small concrete
marker is placed one in each city. With surveying equipment in hand, the angles and
distances between the markers are measured. Then a web of measurements within the
triangle is constructed, and markers are set at node points along the way.
When the three bounding lines are scaled and plotted as a triangle on a flat sheet of paper,
the angles between the lines will not match the field measurements. Moreover, the lines
surveyed in the interior will overlap one another and will overlap the outer boundary rather
than forming nodes at marker locations. The circuit can be surveyed several times using
different techniques, but the result will always be lines and angles that cannot be plotted on
flat paper without distortion relative to field measurements.
If the three bounding lines are plotted on a sphere, scaled distances and angles will be much
closer to the field measurements. Remaining discrepancies will be due to the fact that the
Earth is not a true sphere. Plotting on an ellipsoid will further reduce discrepancies.
Thus, one component of the datum is the mathematical model that best reconciles field
measurements: the radius of the sphere, the length of the semi-major axes of the ellipsoid,
etc. Another component is the relationship of datum markers to a global reference point such
as the observatory (or where the observatory once was) in Greenwich, England. Careful
measurements are made to locate a key marker relative to the global reference. The whole
datum will be tied to this point, so any errors here will be passed on to the rest of the survey.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 31

Datum and latitude/longitude

Later surveys with better technology, such as satellite images, can be expected to make
corrections to the current survey. Later measurement may move the trig point from
N29o58’01.00", W95o21’02.00" to N29o58’01.80", W95o21’02.77", for example. The lat/long
of every road intersection, property boundary, well, etc. would change as a result of relocating
this one key point.
It is unsettling to think that the lat/long location of a well can change, but it does when the
location is translated to another datum.

What is latitude/longitude?
In school and on websites, we learn that latitude and longitude are defined by planes that
pass through the center of the Earth. Latitude is the angle above the Equatorial Plane, and
longitude is the angle from the Meridian Plane, which passes through the marker in
Greenwich, England. These would be geocentric coordinates.
In practice, however, the location of the center of the Earth is unknown, and the intersection
of these planes with the surface is a geodetic and mathematical exercise. The lat/longs we
read on maps and in gazetteers are usually not those that would correspond to planes
intersecting the center of the Earth. Instead, they are "geodetic" lat/longs.
The difference between geocentric and geodetic lat/longs is that geodetic lat/longs are the
best estimates of latitude and longitude, as they would be determined by sightings at sea.
The center of the Earth is not visible, but the horizon is. If the Earth were a sphere, measuring
the angle between the horizon and the sun would be sufficient to determine geocentric
latitude. In addition, if the Earth were homogeneous, plumb bobs would point toward its
center.
Because the Earth is neither homogeneous nor a sphere, we work with geodetic rather than
geocentric coordinates. Instead of measuring relative to the (unknown) center of the Earth,
we measure a tangent (sighting the horizon) to the (known) surface of the sea. Because the
sea is not everywhere visible, many measurements and calculations are required to
determine where the horizon would be if the sea could be seen.
If the shorter axis of the ellipsoid coincides with the Earth’s axis of rotation, geodetic latitude
on the ellipsoid can be converted to geocentric latitude by a simple equation, but accuracy
still depends on the accuracy of the geodetic latitude; differences due to datum would persist.
The preferred practice is to deal with variations in geodetic coordinates rather than variations
in geocentric coordinates.
It is well known that the Earth bulges at the Equator, hence the use of the ellipsoid
approximation. The gravitational contents of the Earth range from water (specific gravity of
1.0) to iron (specific gravity of 7.8). Just as the ellipsoid is as an approximation to the
geometric shape, the geoid approximates the gravitational shape. The gravitational shape
affects how much a plumb bob deviates from pointing at the Earth’s center. More than plumb
bobs are affected. Sea level isn’t actually level because of inhomogeneities; the sea has high
and low areas that can be corrected for the local gravitational field.
It is enough to recognize that latitude at a given point on Earth is measured relative to a
horizon. That horizon is estimated and tied to a global coordinate system by various means of
estimation (measurement). This produces differing geodetic coordinates at the same point.
Latitude and longitude are always relative to a datum. If the wrong datum is used, a well can

32 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Datum and latitude/longitude

be mis-located by a few feet or a few miles. The supplier of lat/long data must also supply the
datum. The difference between NAD27 and NAD83 in Texas is about 150 feet.

Related topics
Ellipsoids and Spheroids
Defining the project coordinate reference system

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 33

Ellipsoids and Spheroids

Ellipsoids and Spheroids

This section contains the following topics:
What is the Earth’s shape based on?
What is Earth’s ‘real’ shape?
WGS84 Geoid Heights
What are Reference Ellipsoids?
What are Spheroids?

What is the Earth’s shape based on?

The figure of the Earth is based on Geometric Earth Models. Flat Earth models are still used
in plane surveying over distances short enough so that Earth curvature is insignificant (< 10
km).
Spherical Earth models are often used in short-range navigation (VOR-DME) and for global
distance approximations. The slight flattening at the poles results in about 20 km difference at
the poles between average spherical radius and polar radius of the Earth.
Ellipsoidal Earth models are required for accurate range and bearing locations over long
distances. Loran-C, GPS navigation receivers use ellipsoidal Earth models to compute
position and waypoint information. The best of these models can represent the shape of the
Earth over smoothed, average sea surface to within approximately one centimeter.

Related topics
Ellipsoids and Spheroids

What is Earth’s ‘real’ shape?

The Earth’s shape can be compared to that of a very smooth potato. An ellipsoid is the best
general fit, but different ellipsoids are required to describe different parts of the Earth.
Geoid surface is an equipotential surface with respect to the gravitational acceleration (g) of
the Earth. ‘g’ is always perpendicular to the geoid at any location on the equipotential surface.

34 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Ellipsoids and Spheroids

If the mean sea level (MSL) geoid is the true shape of the Earth, WGS84 datum fits very well
to the surface. For most of the Earth, the deviation between MSL geoid and WGS84 datum is
plus or minus 40 meters. Exceptions are the North Atlantic Ridge Geoid and the Geoid
elevation in the southern part of India (-60 meters).

Related topics
Ellipsoids and Spheroids

WGS84 Geoid Heights

A 0.25 degree model of WGS84 Geoid (1441 by 721 grid points) published by The National
Imagery and Mapping Agency.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 35

Ellipsoids and Spheroids

Note: The most commonly used coordinate system today is latitude, longitude and height
system.

The Prime Meridian and the Equator are the reference planes used to define latitude and
longitude. Longitude is a positive number east of Greenwich (0 degrees longitude), and a
negative number west of Greenwich. Therefore, in North America, all latitudes are positive
and all longitudes are negative. Remember that longitude is negative in the western
hemisphere and latitude is negative in the southern hemisphere.

Related topics
Projection Methods
Defining the project coordinate reference system
Ellipsoids and Spheroids

What are Reference Ellipsoids?

Reference Ellipsoids are defined by semi-major (equatorial radius) and flattening (the
relationship between equatorial and polar radii). Other reference ellipsoids defined by semi-
minor axis (polar radius) and eccentricity can be computed from these terms.

36 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Ellipsoids and Spheroids

Flattening (f), which is approximately equal to one part over 300 may not be significant in
maps of global scale, but significant for maps of continental or smaller scales.

Related topics
Ellipsoids and Spheroids

What are Spheroids?

A spheroid is a type of ellipsoid, one that is made by rotating an ellipse, in the third
dimension, around either its long (semi-major) or short (semi-minor) axis. When rotated about
its semi-minor axis, a spheroid is an oblate spheroid. The Earth is (roughly) elliptical in cross-
section, rotates about its short axis, and is therefore (approximately) an oblate spheroid.
Many people confuse spheroid and datum. It is probably easiest to remember that a spheroid
is an Earth model; a datum is the practical application of the model. Much of the confusion
arises from the fact that spheroid values go into both calculating lat/long values from a datum,
and calculating XY values with a projection.
Geodetic Latitude at a point: the angle between a tangent to the Earth’s surface at that
point and the axis of rotation.
Longitude at a point: the angle between a reference plane and a plane passing through the
point, both planes being perpendicular to the equatorial plane.
Geodetic Height at a point: the distance from the reference ellipsoid to the point in a
direction normal to the ellipsoid.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 37

Ellipsoids and Spheroids

Semi-Major Axis
Ellipse 1/Flattening
(meters)

Airy 1930 6377569.396 299.3249646

Bessel 1841 6377397.155 299.1528128

Clarke 1866 6378206.4 294.9786982

Clarke 1880 6378249.145 293.465

Everest 1830 6377276345 300.8017

Fischer 1960 (Mercury) 6378166.0 298.3

Fischer 1968 63781X50.0 298.3

GRS 1967 6378160.0 298.247167427

GRS1975 6378140.0 298.257

GRS 1980 6378137.0 298.257222101

Hough 1956 6378270.0 297.0

International 63783880.0 297.0

Krassovsky 1940 6378245.0 298.3.0

38 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Ellipsoids and Spheroids

Semi-Major Axis
Ellipse 1/Flattening
(meters)

South American 1969 6378160.0 298.25

WGS 60 6378165.0 298.3

WGS 66 6378145.0 298.25

WGS 72 6378135.0 298.26

WGS 84 6378137.0 298.257223563

Related topics
Ellipsoids and Spheroids

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 39

Defining the project coordinate reference system

Defining the project coordinate reference system

Kingdom uses Blue Marble GeoCal 6.6 libraries and supports the complete library of EPSG
projected and geodetic coordinate reference systems (CRS).
When creating a project, you must select a coordinate reference system or copy one from
another project. After the project is created, you can open the Project Coordinate System
dialog box from From the Kingdom main menu: Project > Projection > Set Project
Coordinate System.
If your Kingdom project has a NON-EXACT designation, see US State Plane Zones: Exact
Vs. Non-Exact for details on what that means and how to change it to the newer “exact”
system.
For each CRS region listed under Folder on the left, available coordinate reference systems
are listed on the right. Each CRS has the following components:

Display Name By default the display name is the same as the name. However,
you can edit the display name by right-clicking on the row and
selecting Change Display Name.

Name The name of the projection system. You cannot edit this name. The
projection system is used to calculate the XY coordinates.

Geodetic The geodetic datum, the reference from which measurements are
made for the selected CRS.

Horizontal Datum Horizontal datums are used for describing a point on the earth's
surface in latitude and longitude.

Point Style Units The units that correspond to the false_easting and false_northing
measurements of the projection system. To view the coordinate
system definition double-click on the row to open the Projected
Coordinate System Viewer dialog box. Then click the Definition tab.
The point style units do not have to be the same as your Kingdom
project units. For example, the point style units for UTM projections
is meters, but you can still have a Kingdom project in feet with a
UTM CRS.

Projection Type The map projection and projection type used to transform the
latitudes and longitudes on the surface of the sphere or ellipsoid
into locations on a plane. See Coordinate conversion for a more
detailed discussion.

Envelope The area of use defined by a bounding box in decimal degrees. You
can get the specifications of the EPSG code in the
EPSG Geodetic Parameter Dataset.

Dimensions Kingdom projects use 2 dimensional systems.

40 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Defining the project coordinate reference system

EPSG Code The code in the EPSG Dataset for the selected projection. The
European Petroleum Survey Group formed in 1986. Therefore the
State Planes NAD27 NON-EXACT systems do not have an EPSG
code.
See www.epsg.org for more information on the EPSG Dataset
which has detailed information for all projections.

Deprecated If a coordinate system is deprecated, it means that the EPSG has

determined that a better coordinate system is available. Coordinate
systems are only deprecated, not removed.

The Project Coordinate Reference System dialog box provides the following options and
settings:

Add custom Folder or CRS.

Delete custom Folder or CRS.

Note: Only a custom CRS can be deleted.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 41

Defining the project coordinate reference system

Edit custom CRS.

Note: Only a custom CRS can be edited.

View Identification and Definition details of selected CRS.

Copy an existing CRS.

Note: A copy of an existing CRS is considered custom and can be
edited. See Creating custom coordinate systems for details.

Search Enter search item for selected folder, data filters are available in
drop down list box.

To define a CRS for your project:

1. Select a coordinate system region from the Folder list. All available CRS’s and attributes
for the selected CRS region will be displayed on the left.
2. Select the appropriate CRS for your project.
3. Click Next.
4. If a datum shift is required, see Selecting datum transformations (shifts).

Related topics
Projection Methods
Coordinate conversion

US State Plane Zones: Exact Vs. Non-Exact

The original method (Non-Exact) predated modern computing and GPS. These systems
used index tables to derive XY coordinates for a specific area. These State Plane Zones have
since been recalibrated with the use of known GPS locations to more appropriately model the
XY locations from latitude and longitude.The difference in a well location between the Exact
and Non-Exact versions of the same coordinate system is minimal, often just inches.
Kingdom projects created in State Planes NAD27 before the Blue Marble upgrade in
Kingdom 2016 have the Non-Exact system. Only State Planes NAD27 predated the modern
computing and GPS technology. You can safely upgrade to the Exact version of the same
system without affecting your data.
For example:
1. The CRS region of your Kingdom version 8.8 project is US State Plane NON-EXACT.
You found this by going to Project > Projection > Set Project Coordinate System.
• The highlighted CRS on the right has NAD27 in the Geodetic column (datum) so you
know the datum for the project is NAD27.
• The CRS Name is NAD27/Wyoming East Central.
2. In the region list on the left select US State Plane NAD27.

42 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Defining the project coordinate reference system

3. In the list of coordinated reference systems for that region select the same CRS, in this
case NAD27/Wyoming East Central.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Yes in the warning message that the lat-Longs for all wells will be recalculated.

Related topics
Projection Methods
Coordinate conversion

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 43

Selecting datum transformations (shifts)

Selecting datum transformations (shifts)

When placing objects it is critical to know the datum on which its lat/longs are based. If the
datum is wrong, map points can be mis-located by anywhere from a few feet to a several
miles. When importing or exporting some objects, Kingdom verifies the object’s datum
against the project datum and if required, provides the option to apply a datum shift to
properly locate the object.
Kingdom reads where the project is located within the envelope and displays a list of datum
shifts that are best suited for the project.

The Select Datum Shift dialog box provides the following parameters or value for each
selectable datum shift:

Envelope General area of use boundary as specified by EPSG

Accuracy Based on where the project sits within an envelope, the amount of
potential error based on the transformation selected. For example;
the direct NAD27 – NAD83 (NADCON) transformation should
produce results that are within 0.15 distance units (feet or meters).
There is always an inherent error in datum transformations due to
the nature of the calculations. The Accuracy column presents that
margin of error that can be expected from the calculation

44 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Selecting datum transformations (shifts)

Deprecated Indicates if the CRS has been deprecated by the ESPG.

VALID = The CRS has not been deprecated and is considered
“Valid” for use. It can be selected.
INV = The CRS has been deprecated by the ESPG and is
considered “Invalid”. We recommend that you do not use a CRS
marked Invalid.

Type Direct Transformation provides a single calculation to transform

from one datum to another. Via Intermediate uses a 2-step
process to transform the coordinates generally using WGS84 as
an intermediary.

EPSG Code EPSG (European Petrotechnical Survey Group) assigned numeric

codes when projection systems are registered.
See also EPSG Geodetic Parameter Registry.

Related topics
Setting default datum transformations
Defining the project coordinate reference system
Projection considerations for data import and export

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 45

Setting default datum transformations

Setting default datum transformations

Project > Projection > Set Default Datum Transformation
Selecting the best datum transformation for incoming or outgoing data can require specific
knowledge of geodetics. The option to set default datum transformations means that these
selections can be made by the person most suited to make those decisions before the data
updates.
Select a default datum transformation for each commonly used datum for incoming or
outgoing data. The project datum is set when you create the project. The datum of the new
data, either incoming or outgoing, is the target datum.
During data updates, if the target datum is recognized, the set datum transformation is
automatically used.

To set a default datum transformation:

1. Select the target datum. Click the button beside the Target datum field to open the
Select Horizontal Datum dialog box.
2. Select the direction of the data: outgoing or incoming.
• For outgoing data select From project datum to target datum.
• For incoming data select From target datum to project datum.

46 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Setting default datum transformations

Note: The map in Well Explorer is in WGS84. You may be required to select a datum
shift when you display data on the map on the Well Location tab.

3. Select the datum transformation to use for a data transfer to or from the target datum.
• Current default datum transformation
The first option displays the current default datum transformation for the selected
target datum. If a datum transformation has not yet been selected, Not available is
displayed.
• Select from a list of datum transformations suited for the project area
The second option opens the Select Datum Shift dialog box with a filtered list of
datum transformations. The application analyzes the data and displays the best
transformations for the selected project/target combination. The smaller the Accuracy
number, the smaller the distance shift after the transformation.
• Select from a list of all possible datum transformations
The third option opens the Select Datum Shift dialog box with a complete list of
available datum transformations.
4. Click Save the store the selection.

Note: A single project can have many sources of incoming data, and destinations for
outgoing data. Therefore a project may have multiple default datum transformations.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 47

Creating custom coordinate systems

Creating custom coordinate systems

Project > Projection > Create Custom Coordinate System
Kingdom supports creating the following custom coordinate system components:
• Coordinate Systems
• Datum Transformations
• Ellipsoids
• Horizontal Datums
Before creating a custom CRS component, examine the standard systems closely for the
area of interest. A standard system has advantages over custom systems as it is included in
the EPSG Dataset which is maintained and regulated. In addition, some Kingdom options
such as displaying a WMS layer require coordinate reference systems with a EPSG code.
You cannot edit a standard system. You can create a custom system by adding a new object,
or by first copying an existing system and then making necessary changes.

To create a custom system from an existing system:

1. Select Project > Projection > Create Custom Coordinate System.
2. Select the system with specifications closest to the system you want to create.

3. Right-click and select Copy Object or click Copy ( ) below the list of projections to
open the Editor dialog box.
4. Edit the custom system. All fields are editable.
5. After making changes, click OK.The system saves Copy of: original name.
6. Rename as required. Click the Name field and enter a new name.

To create a custom system by adding a new object:

1. Select the level you want the new system to be included in. You cannot add a new object
to “All”, “Recent History”, or “Search History”. You can also create a new folder from the
right-click menu on an existing node.
2. Right-click in the main window and select New Object or click the + icon at the bottom of
the dialog box to open an empty Editor dialog box.
3. Enter the specifications and click OK to save.

48 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Projection considerations for data import and export

Projection considerations for data import and export

The following data types support a coordinate system conversion when importing to and
exporting from your Kingdom project:

Wells Coordinate conversion when importing or exporting wells is

available for all well formats.

2D and 3D Navigation Using the Kingdom import wizard, CRS conversion is supported
(World Coordinates) for import only.
SeismicExplore supports CRS conversion on export for both 2D
and 3D data.

Culture All non-image culture files, and shape (.shp) files. If the
projection information is included in the .prj file associated with
the shape file, you will only be prompted to specify a CRS if a
datum shift is required for the conversion.

Note: Kingdom does not support coordinate conversion for georeferenced image files: .tiff,
.geotiff, and .ecw.

During the importing and exporting process, the following dialog boxes open:
Coordinate System of Imported Data—if the coordinate system of the incoming data is
different from the coordinate system of the Kingdom project, select the correct system. When
the dialog box opens, the coordinate system of the Kingdom project is selected.
Coordinate System of Exported Data—if you want to export the data to a different
coordinate system from the coordinate system of the Kingdom project, select the export
coordinate system. When the dialog box opens, the coordinate system of the Kingdom
project is selected.
See Defining the project coordinate reference system for dialog box details.
The coordinate conversion may require a datum shift. The related topics provide details.

Related topics
Selecting datum transformations (shifts)
Projection Methods
Coordinate conversion

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 49

Projection considerations for data import and export

50 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Project Menu
Introduction
The Project menu on the Kingdom main menu includes options that fall into the following
categories:
• Display options
• Project management options
• Author (user) management and preferences
• Licensing and software updates
You can also open additional Kingdom modules from the Project menu. Geosteering is
included with an Geology Advanced license. All other additional modules require a separate
license.

Display options
Display options from the Project menu include the following:

New Base Map Display a new base map window in current surface and annotation
units.

New Vertical Display Select a new vertical display from seismic data or from wells. In-
lines, Crosslines, 2D lines, arbitrary lines, and cross-sections are
viewed in the vertical dimension, and are displayed in VSD
windows.

Map Open, save, copy, and delete a base map.

Related topics
Project menu options

Project management options

Project management options from the Project menu include the following:

Project Management Create a new project, select your projection method, select your
general and bound project properties, view project details, or change
the preferred mode for active T-D charts and misties.

Create New Project You must exit the current project to create a new project.
Open Project Save Project will write the project data to the project database but
Close Project will not close the project.
Save Project

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 51

 Project options Define the project units, seismic grid increments for your base map,
define the project bounds or extents, specify the order in which your
data is displayed on the base map, or change the preferred mode for
active T-D charts and misties.

Projection Define the project’s projection method. A projection method must be

defined when you create a project.

Security Manage permissions for Windows users in your Kingdom projects.

This feature is only available for Kingdom projects with SQL Server
or Oracle project databases. (Requires a Kingdom Advanced
license)

Related topics
Project menu options

Author (user) management and preferences

Author management and preference options from the Project menu include the following:

Sessions Manage your project session. A session is a saved collection of

application windows. Each author maintains their own sessions.

PAKnotes Create and manage PAKnotes in your project.

Author Management Create, display, select and delete authors from a project. You can
also specify or edit the properties of an author, which includes
changing the name of an author and specifying the storage
directory for an author’s interpretation.

User Preferences Update the settings that are applied throughout the project. These
features control a number of the variable settings for lines, faults,
horizons, and wells.

Related topics
Project menu options

Licensing and software updates

Licensing and software update options from the Project menu include the following:

License Status/Feature View all available Base Feature combinations and optional licensed
Key maintenance features. The type of base feature you select will determine the
options that are available during the Kingdom session.

Users with standalone licenses can also retrieve feature keys.

52 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Update Kingdom Download the latest service pack or hot fix from the IHS Kingdom
Website. You need your IHS My Account credentials to access
software updates from the IHS website.

Related topics
Project menu options

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 53

New Vertical Display

New Vertical Display

Project > New Vertical Display
• Select Line from Seismic—digitize a new line on an active base map with or without
selected wells, digitize a single line across multiple 2D surveys or across multiple
(overlapped) 3D surveys, digitize multiple lines from the base map window, select an
existing arbitrary line for display, or select a 3D survey and display an in-line or crossline.
Also, you can select from a list of data types to apply to the various seismic line displays.
Available with Kingdom Geophysics.
• Select Line from Wells—digitize a new line in an active base map, choose an existing
arbitrary line through selected wells, and choose the project wells through which a new
line can be digitized. Available with Kingdom Geology.

Note: The Select Vertical Display dialog box is the only way to open a previously
named and saved arbitrary line.

54 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Project Management

Project Management
Project > Project Management
The project management commands allow you to create, configure, and manage your
Kingdom projects and authors.
- Create New Project
- Set General and Bound Properties
- View project details—details include location of the project folder and the project
database type, instance, and name.
- Set Display Order—control how data items are displayed on the base map.
- View or change Preferred Modes—set preferences for author based Time-Depth
Charts and Mistie Tables.

Create New Project

Note: You can create a new Kingdom project when logged in to an existing project, but after
entering a project name and specifying a location, you will have to exit the current
project to continue.

Project > Project Management > Create tab

The dialog box items include:

Project Name Type a unique name for the new project.

Browse Click to open the Create New Project dialog box, in which you
can specify a name for the new project and select a path to a
location where you want to store the new project.

Project Directory and Directory—displays the specified file path and directory where
File to be created the new project will be stored.
File—displays the name of the new project with a .tks
extension

Create Click to accept specifications and create the new project. You
will be asked if you are sure you want to close the project. Click
Yes. Kingdom will reopen in the new project.

Set General and Bound Properties

Project > Project Management > Properties tab
Project > Project Options > General tab
Project properties can be set from either the Project Management or Project Options drop
down menus. The content is the same and only needs to be entered from one menu.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 55

Project Management

General
- XY (Surface) Units—also called surface or map units. The XY units determine
distance on displays such as maps, cross-sections, presentation plots, and other
similar displays. User-defined parameters in functions such as gridding and
contouring are also displayed in surface units.
If the surface units are changed, the XY values will remain unchanged, but the latitude
and longitude values associated with those values will be recalculated.This option is
intended to correct improperly loaded data and does not provide a dynamic
conversion of project data from meters to feet or vice-versa.
A prompt will appear inquiring if you wish to change the surface units. Click Yes to
accept changes and return to the Properties tab. Click No to ignore changes and
return to the Properties tab.

Note: All “Feet” units in Kingdom software are understood to be US Survey Feet
which are distinct from International Feet. US Survey Feet were developed for
use in US State Plane coordinate systems, and differ slightly from international
feet: 1 US Ft. = 0.3048006 meters and 1 International Ft. = 0.3048 meters. In
the US Gulf of Mexico, the location difference in some places can be 20 feet or
more.

- Feet—select, then click apply to display XY units in feet.

56 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Project Management

- Meters—select to display XY units in meters.

- Z (Depth) Units—also called depth units selects the Z display units in feet or meters.
These Z units affect depth-related displays such as well logs, geologic cross-sections,
or seismic depth data. Plots, legends, and borehole-related data will be defined in
these selected depth units. This option is intended to correct improperly loaded data
and does not provide a dynamic conversion of project data from meters to feet or
vice-versa.
- Annotations in—select the desired units of display that you wish to use in the
project. Annotation scaling is affected by this setting, but this option is independent of
the type of units loaded in the project. When selecting the size of annotation, there is
threshold tied to this selection. If the value entered is from 0 to 4.0 inches (or 10.2
centimeters), the symbol or text size will display in the selected Annotation units. If the
value is greater than 4.0 inches (or 10.2 centimeters), the symbol or text size will be
controlled by the selected XY (Surface) units, in either feet or meters.

Note: The Kingdom software offers a choice of setting map, depth and annotation
units. All three options can be set to feet, or set to meters or set to mixed units;
however, returning to a project after setting a mixed mode of units will produce
map and scale unit inconsistencies.

- Seismic Datum Elevation is the datum elevation for the seismic data referenced
from sea level in Z units. Positive numbers are above sea level; negative numbers are
below sea level. Seismic datum elevation should not be changed after the project has
been set up.
• Seismic Grid Increment for Basemap—X and Y increments are displayed in surface
units. These values are used in the calculation of the fault surface, and the display of the
fault surface and segment maps. If the increment is set too large, the resulting display can
vary from no display to an extremely blocky display. If the increment is set too small,
performance may be affected. The default value is 110 feet or 110 meters. An alternative
is bin size if the project contains 3D surveys.
- X Increment—enter (type) a value in the adjacent text field.
- Y Increment—enter (type) a value in the adjacent text field.
- Set Default—click to reset the X and Y increments to the default values.

Note: Changing the Z (Depth) Units does not affect currently loaded data. Changing the
“XY(Surface) Units” does not change XYs already loaded but recomputes Lat-
Longs. This means that if the Depth unit convention is changed, the values remain
the same.

Project Bounds
The project bounds define the aerial extent of your project. You can tie your bounds to data in
the project or you can enter the bounds manually.
- Use Data Bounds (unit of measure in Feet or Meters)—allows you to select the
project data bounds based on the maximum extents of the project Surveys, Wells,

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 57

Project Management

Culture or Polygons. You can select one item, or any combination of the four
options, or all four options. The maximum horizontal distance to which any one of the
selected items extends is posted adjacent to the North, South, East, and West
directions displayed below the selected item(s).
- Surveys—select to use project bounds that extend to the maximum extent of any
project 2D or 2D survey.
- Wells—select to use project bounds that extend to the location of any project well.
- Culture—select to use project bounds that extend to the maximum extent of any part
of the project culture.
- Polygons—select to use project bounds that extend to the maximum extent of any
project polygon.
- Define Bounds Manually (unit of measure in Feet or Meters)—select to allow you to
manually input (type) values for the maximum project extents in the North, South,
East and West directions.
- Load—click to open a standard Windows Open dialog box, which allows you to select
a Bounds (*.dat) file containing predefined project bounds. In the Open dialog box,
click to select and highlight the desired file, and then click Open to display the
contents of the file. If the file is valid, the boundary values will display in the Define
Bounds Manually area of the Bounds tab of the Project Options dialog box.
- Save—opens the Save As dialog box, which allows you to specify a file name and
save the data bounds to a *.dat file.

View project details

Project > Project Management > Details tab
The Details tab displays project location and database information about your project.
To access the Details tab, choose Project > Project Management from the Kingdom main
window. Then click the Details tab.

Note: The project details are also displayed on the Select Author dialog box: Project >
Select Author.

Project details are as follows:

Name The project name will be the same as the project .tks file. The
project folder may have a different name.

Path The local or network path to the project folder.

Note: Key project data can reside outside of the project
folder: seismic files, author folders, raster logs, and the
project database. Only Access databases reside inside the
project folder.

58 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Project Management

Database type Kingdom 64-bit supports SQL Server Express, SQL Server, and
Oracle.

Database instance All database types will have an instance. For SQL Server
Express projects, the instance will end in \SMTKingdom.

Database name The name of the database for that project. Some database
configurations may have multiple databases in a single instance.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 59

Project Management

Display Order
Project > Project Options > Display Order tab
Project > Project Management > Display Order tab
The Display Order tab lists all of the items (layers) that can be arranged or ordered on the
base map. Use the up and down arrows change the order. The following list is in Default
order

Grid Overlay A layer of grid details which displays when the Parameters tab
is selected in the Grid Data dialog box: Grids > Create Grid.
Possible details include grid cells, grid node and grid value
postings, and data colors from the Advanced statistics.

Wells Well spot and posted text surrounding well spot.

Culture Named culture group; more than one group can exist on a base
map.

Contours Named set of contours; more than one set can exist on a base
map.

Survey Grid The lines representing survey geometry; it is green when

inactive, red when active.

Survey Annotation Annotations for the survey geometry; the in-line, crossline,
shotpoint text.

Map Grids Lines or ticks for XY or lat/long coordinates.

XY Outline Annotations for the XY or lat/long coordinates.

Faults & Fault Polygon Raster display of fault surfaces or segments; fault polygon sets.

Planimeter Polygons Named planimeter polygons; more than one planimeter polygon
can exist on a base map.

Raster Map Display of horizons or grids; only one raster map can exist on a
base map.

60 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Project Management

Preferred Modes
Project > Project Management > Preferred Modes tab
Project > Project Options > Preferred Modes tab
Kingdom versions 8.6 and later include the option to select a default mode for managing your
mistie corrections and active time-depth charts. The default mode is Author preferred, which
manages preferences for mistie corrections and active time-depth charts separately for each
author.The other mode available is Project mode, which stores a single set of preferences for
mistie corrections and a single well to time-depth chart mapping file for all authors for each
project.
The first time you open a project in Kingdom (or create a new project) you will see a New
Features message that includes the current settings for both mistie corrections and active
time-depth charts. Every author will receive the message.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 61

Time-depth charts

Time-depth charts
Kingdom provides 2 options for managing your active time-depth charts: author preferred
mode or project mode. When you open a project for the first time, you will get a message
informing you of this option:

To change modes, go to Projects > Project Management and select the Preferred Modes
tab. After you change your preference, the project will automatically close and reopen to
implement the change.
If you already have the Preferred Mode option selected and you still see the message, then
the Preferred file is missing.

Mistie corrections
The following table describes the difference between Project mode and Author preferred
mode for mistie corrections.

Author preferred Automatically loads the author’s preferred mistie table on login.
Authors are not affected by other authors’ mistie correction
preferences.
When an author logs in to the project for the first time, a mistie
table file is created for that author in the database. If the author
makes any mistie corrections or loads a different mistie table, the
changes will not affect the other authors. Each author works within
his or her own mistie corrections.

Project mode Uses a single mistie table for all authors. When an author makes a
mistie correction or loads a different mistie table, the change are
written to the database and applied to all interpretations and
related brick, slice, or Illuminator volumes. All authors see the
changes.

62 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Time-depth charts

Active time-depth charts

The following table describes the difference between Project mode and Author preferred
mode for time-depth charts.

Author preferred Enables authors in the project to create and maintain an author-
mode specific well to active time-depth chart mapping list. When an author
logs in to the project for the first time, a well to time-depth chart list is
created for that author. Any changes the author makes to the
mappings will update his or her preferred list but will not affect other
authors.

Project mode Uses a single well to active time-depth chart mapping list for all
authors in the project. The mappings are stored in the database. Any
changes made to the well-active T-D chart mapping affect all authors.
Kingdom versions 8.5 and earlier use Project mode.

Switching project modes

You can change the project mode at any time. There are certain consequences to switching
modes that it is important to keep in mind.

Warning: If you change project modes, all authors are affected. Each author is notified of
the change when logging in to the project.

Switching to project mode

When switching from Author preferred to Project mode, all authors will have their mistie and
time-depth chart preferences set based on the current content of the project database. That
content reflects any mistie and time-depth chart preferences set by the last author to make
any such changes. Any other individual author preferences are ignored.
It is recommended that you coordinate any well edits among all authors going forward such
that the last edits are the ones you want to save in the project database. These changes
affect all authors. You may want to switch to Project mode if you want all authors to receive
well edits from all other authors.

Switching to Author Preferred Mode

When switching from Project mode to Author preferred mode, each author connects to their
previous preference files, if they exist. This means that for existing authors, any changes to
mistie and time-depth chart preferences in the database since the project was last in Author
preferred mode are ignored. To synchronize author preferences with the project database,
you can delete the MyDefaultPreferredTDList.ptd file, which contains the time-depth
chart settings for each author, and the AuthoredMistieData.dat file, which contains the
mistie preferences for each author. The MyDefaultPreferredTDList.ptd file is located
here: <project folder>\<author>\ PreferredLists. The AuthoredMistieData.dat file
is located here: <project folder>\<author>\. By deleting these files, Kingdom creates
new versions of them for each author based on the current content of the project database.
Kingdom creates new preference files for any new authors based on the current content of
the project database.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 63

Time-depth charts

Preferred file is missing

If you already have Author preferred mode selected and you still get the Please Note
message, then the associated file with the time-depth chart or mistie information is missing.

T-D Chart File When each author opens the project, a PreferredLists folder is created
in the author folder. Inside the folder is the
MyDefaultPreferredTDList.ptd file, which contains the active time-
depth chart for each borehole. If this file is missing, you will get the
New Features message. Click OK. A new
MyDefaultPreferredTDList.ptd file is created based on the
current database information.
File Location: <project folder>\<author>\ PreferredLists

Mistie File When the first author opens the project with the Preferred mode active,
an AuthoredMistieData.dat file is created in each author folder. This
file contains the mistie corrections based on the database information
at the time the project was opened. All authors will begin with the same
table.
If this file is missing, you will get the New Features message. Click OK.
A new mistie data file will be created based on the current database
information.
File Location: <project folder>\<author>\
AuthoredMistieData.dat

64 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Project options

Project options
You can set the following project options for the project:

Set General and Bound Set the map, depth, annotation units and seismic datum
Properties elevation. Select the project data bounds based on the maximum
extents of the project Surveys, Wells, Culture or Polygons
You can also set the general and bound properties through the
Project Management interface: Project > Project Management
> Properties.

Display Order Control how data items are displayed.

Level of Detail Specify the scale values where you want the well data displayed
on the base map to automatically change from the standard
posting to a reduced level of detail posting.

Preferred Modes Select a preferred mode for managing your mistie corrections
and active time-depth charts.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 65

Project options

Level of Detail
Project > Project Options > Level of Detail tab
In the Level of Detail tab specify the scale values where you want the well data displayed on
the base map to automatically change from the standard posting to a reduced level of detail
posting.
With the Level of Detail option enabled, you can zoom in to a section of a base map and view
the well data posting, and then zoom out to view the entire project without having your base
map cluttered by the possibly illegible posted data. Therefore, this automatic adjustment of
the posting significantly improves both performance and usability especially for large
projects.
To access the Level of Detail tab, choose Project > Project Options from the Kingdom
main menu. The Project Options dialog box appears. Click the Level of Detail tab.

Tip: You can experiment with the appearance of different scale values through the Settings
dialog box. From the Kingdom main menu, select View > Settings. On the Scale tab,
enter a value in the Relative Scale field and view the base map.
You can also access the Settings dialog box by clicking the scale icon on the Base
Map toolbar.

66 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Project options

Dialog box items include:

• Enable Level of Detail for Posted Data—check to activate the Level of Detail option.
Once activated, you can enter values in the desired scale text boxes.

Note: You can also enable the Level of Detail by clicking the LOD icon on the Base
Map toolbar or through the Wells menu. From the Kingdom main menu, select
Wells > Enable Level of Detail.

• Display/If Scale is—each item listed on the left will display on the base map as specified
by the value in If Scale is. The values in If Scale Is controls the posted detail of the
following items:
Well Symbol as Dot—enter the value that the relative scale of the base map needs
to exceed before the well symbol is displayed as a dot. If the relative scale of the base
map is equal to or smaller than the value entered, the well symbol appears.
Deviation Survey as Straight Line—enter the value that the relative scale of the
base map needs to exceed before the deviation survey is displayed as a straight line.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 67

Project options

If the relative scale of the base map is equal to or closer than the value entered, the
path of the deviated well displays as it normally would.
Well Information—enter the value that the relative scale of the base map needs to
exceed before the well information is not displayed on the base map. If the relative
scale of the base map is equal to or closer than the value entered, the selected well
information appears on the base map.
Cumulative Production—enter the value that the relative scale of the base map
needs to exceed before the cumulative production is not displayed on the base map.
If the relative scale of the base map is equal to or closer than the value entered, the
selected cumulative production appears on the base map.
Zone Attributes—enter the value that the relative scale of the base map needs to
exceed before the zone attributes are not displayed on the base map. If the relative
scale of the base map is equal to or closer than the value entered, the zone attributes
appear on the base map.
Formation and Production Tests—enter the value that the relative scale of the base
map needs to exceed before the formation and production tests are not displayed on
the base map. If the relative scale of the base map is equal to or closer than the value
entered, the selected formation and production tests appear on the base map.
Perforation Information—enter the value that the relative scale of the base map
needs to exceed before the perforation information is not displayed on the base map.
If the relative scale of the base map is equal to or closer than the value entered, the
perforation information appears on the base map.
Fault Cut and Formation Tops—enter the value that the relative scale of the base
map needs to exceed before the fault cut and formation tops are not displayed on the
base map. If the relative scale of the base map is equal to or closer than the value
entered, the fault cut and formation tops appear on the base map.
Attribute and Bubble Map—enter the value that the relative scale of the base map
needs to exceed before the attribute map and bubble map are not displayed on the
base map. If the relative scale of the base map is equal to or closer than the value
entered, the attribute map and bubble map appear on the base map.
Log Signature Map—enter the value that the relative scale of the base map needs to
exceed before the log signature map is not displayed on the base map. If the relative
scale of the base map is equal to or closer than the value entered, the log signature
map appears on the base map

Note: The scale units may be Imperial (feet / inches) or Metric (meters / centimeters)
or a combination.

Reset to System Default—click to reset to the default scale values.

Save—click to open the Save LOD Settings dialog box and enter a unique name to save
the scale values to the <filename>.lod file. You can then load these values to other
projects from the saved file.

68 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Project options

Load—click to open the Load LOD Settings dialog box and load a saved template of
scale values to your Level of Detail settings. Navigate to the <filename>.lod file and
click Open.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 69

Managing authors

Managing authors
Project > Author Management
The options on the Author Management dialog box to perform the following tasks.

Create Create a new author name and storage directory for the new author’s
interpretation. The author and directory are initially empty. When an author
is active, interpreting adds new information to the directory.

Display Control which author’s interpretation is available in the project. Author

interpretation can be displayed in vertical and base map windows.

Properties Control each author’s name and displays the storage directory.

Select Control the author currently logged in. If the author selection is changed,
then the project closes and reopens with that author active.

Copy Create a new author from an existing author, and copy data and
interpretations from an author.

Delete Create a new author from an existing author, and copy data and
interpretations from an author.

You can also change the name of the author and specify the directory where the author’s
interpretation is saved.

70 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Managing authors

Creating a new author

Project > Author Management > Create tab
Creating a new author creates a folder in the project folder that stores the author’s
interpretation. The author and directory are initially empty. When an author is active,
interpreting adds new information to the directory.
The dialog box items include:

New Author Name Enter a unique name for the new author. This can be a name,
initials, title, area, etc.

Directory where this Displays the default path and location to save the
author’s interpretation interpretations. The default location is in the project folder. The
will be saved new author’s name will become a subfolder of the project
directory.

Browse Open a standard Windows Open dialog box to select a new

directory in which to store this author’s work if you do not want
to save it in the default directory.

Selecting authors to display

Project > Author Management > Display tab
Selecting authors in the Display tab turns those authors on in Project Explorer, and displays
their interpretation. Authored interpretation data can be displayed on the base map, vertical
sections, and in VuPAK.

Editing author properties

Project > Author Management > Properties tab
Rename an author on the Properties tab. The renamed author’s interpretation is saved to the
original author folder. The path to the author folder is displayed under Directory where this
author’s interpretation will be saved and cannot be changed. Do not rename the author
folder or the application will not be able to locate that author’s interpretation.

Selecting an author
Project > Author Management > Select tab
Select a different author for the active author. Multiple authors can be displayed
simultaneously, but only one author can be active at a time. The active author (or user) is the
one that owns all subsequent interpretation (until the active author changes). Any newly
created interpretation will be stored with the name of the active author name in the active
author’s directory.
You can select an author from several locations. The location you open it from determines
what fields are displayed on the dialog box. If a project is already open, the active author’s

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 71

Managing authors

name is displayed in gray text. It cannot be selected. All the inactive author names are
displayed in black text.

Select Author

Project > Select Author

Multiple authors can be displayed simultaneously, but only one author can be active at a time.
The active author (or user) is the one that owns all subsequent interpretation (until the active
author changes). Any newly created interpretation will be stored with the name of the active
author name in the active author’s directory.
Select one of the inactive author names as the new active author. If a project is already open,
the active author name is displayed in gray text. It cannot be selected. All the inactive author
names are displayed in black text.

Create Click to open a dialog box similar to the Creating a new author
of the Author Management dialog box so you can create a new
author.

Project Details Lists important information about the project:

• Name The project name will be the same as the project .tks file. The
project folder may have a different name.

• Path The local or network path to the project folder.

Note that key project data can reside outside of the project
folder: seismic files, author folders, raster logs, and the project
database. Only Auto SQL Server Express databases reside
inside the project folder.
• Database type Kingdom 64-bit support SQL Server Express, SQL Server, and
Oracle.

• Database instance All database types except Access will have an instance. For
SQL Server Express projects, the instance will end in
\SMTKINGDOM.

• Database name The name of the database for that project. Some database
configurations may have multiple databases in a single
instance.

Copying another author’s interpretation

Project > Author Management > Copy tab
Copy data from an existing author to the active user (current author). Data can be copied
from an author while the author is working in a project.

72 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Managing authors

To copy items from another author:

1. Select the name of the Author to copy from. Only one author can be copied at a time.
The list of authors does not include the active user (current author).
You can also create an author or select a different author to be the active author.
2. Select a copy method:

Select specific data Copy data from a single data category. Select a data
category to display all items in that category. Then select
the items.
To locate items in a long list, enter the first few
alphanumeric characters in the item name.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 73

Managing authors

Copy all data Copy all data from the selected author. When selected,
Select data category options are disabled.

Data categories include the following:

Note: Stratigraphic Columns are sequenced formation tops from top (youngest) to
bottom (oldest). This option copies the formation top names only. If you do not
have a formation top in the column, the application creates it for you.

3. Select a Rule for copying to existing Authors. The rule specifies how to handle data
items that you already have. Options include the following:

Always use prefix or suffix Add a prefix or suffix to the incoming name of all items.

If duplicate data type and • Add prefix or suffix to incoming name—the default
name already exist prefix/suffix is Copy of.
• Do not add incoming data—do not copy the data if
the name of the copied data is duplicated in your
project.
• Overwrite existing data with incoming data—
overwrite your data with the copied data if the name of
the copied data is duplicated in your project.

Copy name only This option applies to formation tops only. You can just
copy the top names from another author, but not the
formation top picks.

4. Click OK or Apply to begin the copy process.

74 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Managing authors

The application checks for estimated space. The the copy process begins. If you selected
to copy faults, you need to specify your preference for Copying unassigned faults.
5. After the copy process is finished, the Author Copy Summary dialog box displays the
items successfully copied.

Copying unassigned faults

There are three options for copying unassigned faults:
• Merge—keep existing unassigned faults and add incoming unassigned faults. Identical
unassigned faults will merge to a single unassigned fault.
• Replace—replace all existing unassigned faults with incoming unassigned faults.
• Skip—skip copying unassigned faults.
Select one of the options on the dialog box and click OK.

Author Copy Summary

The Author Copy Summary dialog box appears after the data from an author has been
copied to the current autho0r.
The dialog box items include:

Author Category Lists the selected data category of copied data.

Category Item Lists the name of the copied data item.

Required Space Lists the amount of disk space required to store the copied data.

Status Lists whether the category item was copied, or if the copy failed.
If the copied item had the same name of the data item in your
project, then either Duplicate: Not Copied, Duplicate:
Overwritten, or Renamed: will appear in front of the name of the
copied data, depending on the rule selected from the Copy tab.
In the case of duplicate data, if you specified to use a prefix or
suffix to change the name of the copied data, the prefix Copy_of_
is appended to the front of the copied data name, or the suffix
_Copy is appended to the end of the copied data name.

Copy logs
Each time an author copy operation is performed, a log file is updated in the active author’s
directory. Browse to the project directory, then to the active author’s directory. The file is
named AuthorCopyInfo.dat. Open the fie using WordPad or Notepad. The file lists the
date, time, copy from author, copy rule, and all the categories: category items copied. The file
is overwritten each time a copy takes place for the active author.
At the same time, a separate log file is recorded for each author copy. Browse to the project
directory, then to the Log directory. The file is named AuthorCopydate]time].log. Open
using WordPad or Notepad. The file lists the Date, Time,Categoriy, Category Item,
Required Space, and Status.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 75

Managing authors

Deleting author(s)
Warning: The delete operation is irreversible.

Project > Author Management > Delete tab

In the Delete tab of the Author Management dialog box, remove one or more authors and all
owned interpretation and database items from the project. You cannot delete the active
author.
In addition to the database items, you can also remove the author’s home directory.

Note: The following requirements must be met before the author’s home directory can be
deleted:

1. The directory must be empty.

2. The current author must have permissions to the directory.
3. The original directory path must be valid.

76 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

User Preferences
Use the tabs on the User Preferences dialog box to specify settings that are applied
throughout the project.
The tabs on the User Preferences dialog box change based on the window that is active.
The following options are available:
• Kingdom Start Page > User Preferences
• Project Tree active: Project > User Preferences
• Base Map or VSD active: Project > User Preferences
• VSD active: Right-click in ruler and select Ruler Preferences
The figure below displays the User Preference tabs for the 3 options:

The available tabs in alphabetical order are as follows:

Auto Recovery When this option is enabled, all open views are automatically saved
at the specified time interval and can be recovered if Kingdom
unexpectedly shuts down.

Colors Specify the color of the background and the different types of lines on
the base map.

Fault System Select a fault system. An improved fault system was introduced with
Kingdom version 8.6. By default, the new fault system is selected.

General Specify several global project options.

Line Thickness Specify the line thickness for objects like horizons, faults, and
surveys.

Notifications Did you check “do not show me this again”? Turn notifications on and
off.

Number Format Specify how many significant digits to display for numbers in all views
for time, depth, X, Y, lines and traces.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 77

User Preferences

Seismic Caching Use the random access memory (RAM) in the storage and
subsequently retrieve seismic data for display.

Startup Specify which windows will be active when the application starts.

Tool Tip Specify how tool tips are displayed in particular windows or displays.

Well List Select the data to display in a well list.

Wells Specify basic display features associated with wells.

Wiggle options Specify the color of wiggle traces in vertical seismic windows.

• When the base map, Vertical Seismic Display, SynPAK window, or Log Editor window
is active, there is an additional Display Tool Tip where you can specify the display of tool
tips within windows. The selections depend on the active window.

Auto Recovery
Project > User Preferences > Auto Recovery tab
The Auto Recovery tab includes the following settings:

Save auto recovery Select to enable the auto recovery feature.

session

Auto recovery path Specify a location for the auto recovery files. The default location is
in the active author’s folder in the project folder.

Save interval Enter the save interval in minutes. The maximum interval is 120
minutes.

The Auto Recovery option is author-based. Therefore, this option is not available when User
Preferences is selected from the Kingdom Start Page.
One benefit of this feature is if Kingdom were to shut down unexpectedly, when you re-open
the project, you will have the option to recover the last, auto-saved session:

If you have not enabled this option, or the auto-save session cannot be found, you will be
given the option to manually browse to a session file, or to open the project with only Project
Explorer and the base map:

78 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

Related topics
Sessions
Project Menu

Base Map Colors

Project > User Preferences > Colors tab
In the User Preferences dialog box, use the Colors tab to specify the background color of
the base map and line colors for inlines, crosslines, 2D lines, and overlay colors.
The Color tab includes the following settings:

Colorbar Directory Displays the path to the current color bar folder.

Show Color Bar File Check to display the name of the color bar in the Status Bar
Name below the base map.

Browse Click to open the Select Folder dialog box to navigate to the
desired color bar folder.

Base map Background Displays the current color for the base map background in all
Color base maps. If needed, select a new color for the base map
background. the default base map background color is white.
If you change the background color, annotations shown in color
other than black or white may not be as visible. For example,
black text does not show against a dark base map background
color. As the background color is changed from a light color to a
darker color (or vice versa), black annotation reverses
automatically to white annotation (or vice versa). Annotation that
is displayed in another color remains unchanged and you may
need to manually change some color settings so that displayed
annotation is more visible

Inline Color Displays the current color for the inlines in all base maps. If
needed, select a new color for inlines. The default inline color is
gray.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 79

User Preferences

Crossline Color Displays the current color for the crosslines in all base maps. The
default inline color is green.

2D Line Color Displays the current color for the 2D lines in all base maps.The
default 2D line color is gray.

Line Overlay Color Displays the current color for the line overlay in all base maps.
The default line overlay color is red. Line Overlay overlies and
marks the location of that part of a line displayed in the current
Vertical Seismic Display window.

Arbitrary Line Overlay Displays the current color for the arbitrary line overlay in all base
Color maps. The default line overlay color is red. Arbitrary Line
Overlay overlies and marks the location of that part of an
arbitrary line displayed in the current Vertical Seismic Display
window.

Visible Line Overlay Displays the current color for the Visible Line Overlay in all base
Color maps. The default Visible Line Overlay color is blue. Visible Line
Overlay is a rectangle that surrounds and marks the location on
the base map of that part of a line displayed in the current
Vertical Seismic Display (VSD) window. If you zoom in on a line
displayed in the current VSD, the Visible Line Overlay rectangle
is reduced proportionally in size on the base map to surround
only that part of the line that is visible in the VSD window.
When a Visible Line Overlay rectangle is displayed on the base
map and you move the horizontal scroll bar in the VSD window,
the Visible Line Overlay rectangle on the base map moves
correspondingly to surround that part of the line that is visible in
the VSD window.

VuPAK Line Overlay Changes the color of cross section lines on the base map for
cross sections picked in the VuPAK workspace.

Reset Click to revert to system default color values.

80 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

General project options

Project > User Preferences > General tab
In the User Preferences dialog box, use the General tab to specify several global project
options.

General project options include the following:

Horizon Intersection Size Control the size of the open horizon intersection circles in
annotation units. These circles indicate that the horizon has
been interpreted at a particular XY on an intersecting 2D
survey. The pick exists on the intersecting survey’s traces, not
on the traces within the current window. This pick can only be
edited when its host traces are visible. This does not apply to
3D surveys. The default is 0.04 inches or 0.1 centimeters

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 81

User Preferences

Fault Intersection size Control the size of the fault line intersection + signs in
annotation units. These signs mark the intersection of fault
surfaces with intersecting base map and vertical views. It also
controls the size of the x signs that mark the joints, or digitized
nodes, in a fault segment. The default is 0.08 inches or 0.2
centimeters.

Highlight Marker Size Control the size of the small squares or nodes that mark
an object as selected. The default is 7 pixels.

Auto Scroll Adjust the speed for scrolling during interpretation of faults
and horizons. The default is on. Drag and drop the scale
controller to adjust the speed.

Enable Mouse Center Activate the option to zoom in or out using the center mouse
Wheel Zoom wheel. This option does not work in AVO, on synthetics, and
on crossplots.

Forward mouse wheel The default is to zoom in when moving the mouse wheel
navigation forward.

Cursor Style Select the Arrow or Crosshair cursor style.

List Order List objects alphabetically or chronologically with the newest

on top.

Data Type Order Control the order of data types listed in vertical displays and
data type selection dialog boxes. Options include:
• Alphabetical
• Last on Top—persists the last data type you viewed
• User Defined—honors the order defined under Surveys >
Data Type Management > Priority. You can also select to
always display the Geologic sections (Correlation and
Cross Sections) on the top or bottom of the list.

Seismic Display Scale Control the scale factor when using F5 (increase seismic
Factor amplitude) and F6 (decrease seismic amplitude). A setting of
2 causes the amplitude to appear boosted or reduced by a
factor of two. A value of 1.1 results in a finer adjustment. The
default is a factor of 1.6

Keep Minimized Windows Display the iconized window on top of all inactive windows.
on Top of all Other Windows This allows for easier viewing of minimized windows. The
Except for the Active default is off.
Window

Enable undo/redo for Enable keyboard shortcuts for undo (Ctrl+Z) and redo (Ctrl+Y)
horizon picking when picking horizons.

82 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

Enable display of seismic Seismic data and horizons are available for view only access
data and horizons with with a Kingdom Geology license. However, if you do not want
Kingdom Geology to load this data on startup, clear the checkbox. The default is
to load the data. If you are already in the project, you will need
to close and reopen the project to load the data.
If you have a custom collection that includes seismic and
horizon data, then clearing this option removes the data from
that collection. If you enable the option again, the collection
will not contain the seismic and horizon data. You will have to
manually edit the collection to add it back.

Reset Sets all parameters back to the default.

Note: Project Tree and List Order, Seismic Display Scale Factor and Keep Minimized
Windows on Top of all Other Windows Except for the Active Window options are
only available under User Preferences if opened from within a Kingdom project.

Line Thickness
Project > User Preferences > Line Thickness tab
In the User Preferences dialog box, use the Line Thickness tab to set the thickness of
objects like horizons, faults, and surveys, and overlays in the project.
Dialog box items include:

Horizons Set the thickness of horizon and grid lines in annotation units. The
horizon lines are displayed in vertical seismic windows. The default is
0.03 inches or 0.08 centimeters.

Faults Set the thickness of both fault line segments and fault surfaces in
annotation units. The fault lines are displayed in vertical seismic
windows. The default is 0.03 inches or 0.08 centimeters.

Survey Grid Lines Set the thickness of the lines marking 2D and 3D seismic trace grids
in annotation units. The default is 0.01 inches or 0.03 centimeters.

Map Line Overlays Set the thickness of the lines marking the location of open vertical
and time slices in annotation units. They typically appear as red lines
in vertical and map windows. The default is 0.03 inches or 0.08
centimeters.

2D Raster Lines Set the thickness of 2D ribbon lines in annotation units. The 2D raster
lines are displayed in base map view. Recall that an interpreted
seismic display is visible in map view as a colored strip. The default
is 0.06 inches or 0.15 centimeters.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 83

User Preferences

Crosshair Set the thickness of the crosshair cursor.

Note: The minimum value is 0.01 inches or 0.025 centimeters for all items.

Click Reset to revert to the system defaults.

Fault System
Kingdom Start Page > User Preferences > Fault System tab

Note: This option is not available under User Preferences if opened from within a Kingdom
project. You must access User Preferences from the Kingdom Start Page.

• Fault System— takes the existing fault points and segments and creates a surface using
triangles. The new algorithmic engine produces better fault surfaces and fault polygons
than the old fault system. Faults created in or converted to the new fault system can be
smoothed, and the boundary condition for faults can be specified as trend or die out.
The default is the new fault system. The new fault system preserves the original fault
data. If you move back to the old fault system, smoothing or editing of fault picks will be
saved but the fault surface created with the new system will not.
This option is machine/login account specific.
See Kingdom Fault Systems
• Old fault system—With the old fault system, a fault surface is calculated from all the
points, on all the lines, using a gradient projection algorithm. It is not an exact interpolator,
so it may not fit the input lines exactly. In fact, how well the surface fits the fault lines is a
measure of how continuous the segments are. The surface is automatically re-calculated
every time a new fault segment is added or when an existing segment is modified.

84 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

Click OK to exit User Preferences or Apply to keep User Preferences open.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 85

User Preferences

Notifications
Project > User Preferences > Notifications tab
In the User Preferences dialog box, the Notifications tab provides options to turn on or off
various project notifications. You can “Show again” a dialog box in which you had previously
selected “Do not show me this again.”
Available notifications are the following:
• New well update
- Notify me whenever new wells are added to the project—you will be notified when
logging in to the project if new wells that have an associated T-D Chart have been
added to the project since you last logged in.
- Disable this notification—turn off the wells notification reminder.
• Database:
- Show “Migrate Project Database” dialog for MS-Access Projects
By default, when you open a Kingdom project with an Access database, a message
appears asking if you want to migrate your project database to SQL Server Express
(Auto or Manual), SQL Server, or Oracle. If you check “Do not show me this again”,
the message will not appear unless you check to show this dialog.
- Show “Change SQL Server Express Configuration” dialog for Manual SQL
Server Express Projects
By default, when you open a Kingdom project with a Manual SQL Server Express
(SSE) database, a message appears asking if you want to change the SQL Server
Express Configuration to Auto SSE. If you check “Do not show me this again”, the
message will not appear unless you check to show this dialog.
- Show “Other User Active” warning when closing Auto SSE projects
When the last author exits an Auto SSE project, the database automatically detaches
and is stored in the project folder making the project easily portable. If there are still
authors in the project when you close, a notification appears warning you that other
users are still in the project - thus the project is not portable. If you check “Do not
show me this again”, the message will not appear unless you check to show this
dialog.
• Other:
- Show “Turn on New Fault System” message
See Database Considerations for information on choosing a database.

86 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

Seismic Caching
Project > User Preferences > Seismic Caching tab
In User Preferences dialog box click the Seismic Caching tab as shown in the figure below.
A project must be open before this tab is available.
Data stored on a local disk or in RAM can be retrieved at a faster rate than data stored on an
external disk. Seismic Line Caching is especially useful when the data is being displayed
across a network or in an order other than the primary order of the disk file (i.e. crossline
displays from data stored in an inline order).
You have two choices for seismic caching:
• Enable local disk seismic caching—optimizes performance when viewing vertical seismic
displays by caching recently read portions of brick and trace data to a specified local disk.
• Enable Seismic Line/Slices to Cache—improves performance when viewing vertical
seismic displays by allowing you to specify the seismic line type and number of lines you
want to cache to random access memory (RAM). When this option is checked on,
physical RAM is allocated and deallocated as needed to display the specified seismic
data (time slice, inlines, crosslines). For this option, the entire line or slice is cached.

Which option do I choose?

Although you can have both options selected, typically you will have only one.
• The local disk seismic caching option displays selected seismic faster than the RAM
caching as only the active line portions are retrieved.
• The RAM caching option caches the entire line. Initial retrieval may take a little longer
than the local disk option.

Note: If you are receiving low memory warnings or suspect memory issues are affecting
performance, try turning off the seismic caching.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 87

User Preferences

Enable local disk seismic caching

This option caches recently read portions of brick or trace data to the specified local disk for
quicker display and better performance. Kingdom will also pre-fetch neighboring data in the
vertical seismic display (VSD) window to optimize display time when you scroll or jump to
neighboring lines. When you deselect this option and Apply, the contents of the local cache
are deleted.
- Use drive—click the down arrow to select the local drive on which the seismic is to be
cached. All available local drives will be listed.
- Create folder—accept the default folder name TKSCaching, or enter a different
name.
- Maximum cache size—specify the desired cache size. The default is 1 GB.When the
maximum cache size is exceeded, the data with the oldest retrieval time is replaced.
- Delete Local Cache—click to delete the contents of the cache. The folder with the
specified size will remain.

88 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

Enable Seismic Line/Slices to Cache

This option stores the specified seismic data in RAM for display. When a second call is made
for the display of seismic data, RAM is checked first, before a call is made to the physical disk
file. When the maximum number of allowable lines is exceeded, the data with the oldest
retrieval time is replaced in RAM. The default is checked Off.
• If Enable Seismic Line/Slice Caching is checked Off during the session, the cache will
be emptied and released and all options will be grayed out.
• Type of Seismic Lines/Slices to Cache allows you to select which line types are to be
stored in RAM. This is useful in limiting RAM storage to the types of displays that require
the most access time (i.e., crossline data from data store in an inline order).
All types or any combination of line types may be selected. Select the type of seismic
displays whose data will be stored in RAM. By default all five types are selected: 2D lines,
arbitrary lines, 3D in-lines, slices, and 3D cross-lines.
• Maximum total number of items to cache—specifies the number of lines to store in
RAM at any given time. The default is 10. This number can be adjusted to accommodate
the system and/or the individual author's needs. The value can be changed during the
Kingdom session.
When the maximum number of lines allowed in the RAM cache is exceeded, space is
created for the next line by replacing an existing line stored in the RAM cache. The line to
be replaced is selected based on a time stamp which is recorded when the line is called
for display. The line with the oldest time stamp is replaced.
• Line/Slice Name, Attribute, Type and Mem Usage displays a table identifying
information about data stored in RAM.
Below the table, the current cache size and available RAM values are displayed. This
information can be used to increase the value of Maximum Number of Lines and Slices to
Cache, thereby utilizing the RAM on a system-by-system basis.
The physical memory available is updated dynamically as the operating system routinely
polls for resources. The units are in mega bytes.
• Delete Line and Slice Cache —clears the entire memory of all the seismic data stored in
RAM during the current Kingdom session.

Note: If physical RAM is exceeded for a call to display then virtual memory will begin to be
utilized. At this point the speed advantage of additional “caching” is negligible.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 89

User Preferences

Number Format
Project > User Preferences > Number Format tab
In the User Preferences dialog box, use the Number Format tab to control how many
significant digits to display in all views for time, depth, X, Y, lines and traces.

Right-click in a VSD ruler and

select Ruler Preferences to
display the Number Format
tab.

The default number of decimal places are displayed in the figure above. The maximum
number of decimal places is 5.

Startup Options
Project > User Preferences > Startup tab

90 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

In the User Preferences dialog box use the Startup tab to specify which windows will be
active when the application starts.

The Startup tab contains the following elements:

• Startup Windows determines which windows to display when the project is opened.
- Show only previous base map—(default selection) select this option to display only
the previous base map when the project opens.
- Show all previous windows—select this option to open all windows that were open
when the project was last closed.
- Select a session—select this option to have Kingdom prompt you to open a
previously saved session. When you close a project, Kingdom displays the Save
Session File dialog box so you can save the current collection of windows, settings,
and the screen location as a Sessions. The session is saved with an assigned name
so you can choose when you reopen your project. You choose the session you want
to open from the Open Session file dialog box.
• License Search Sequence
- Get License from My Computer (Standalone Edition)—turn on to obtain a
standalone license from the sentinel that is attached to the computer that you are
using.
- Get License from Network License Server (Network Edition)—turn on to obtain a
standalone license from the sentinel that is attached to the network license server.
• Reset—click to reset Startup parameters to system default values.+

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 91

User Preferences

Display Tool Tip

Note: A base map window, Vertical Seismic Display window, Log Editor window or
SynPAK window must be active.

Project > User Preferences > Tool Tip tab

In the User Preferences dialog box, use the Tool Tip tab to specify how tool tips are
displayed in particular windows or displays.
Tool Tips are balloon windows that pop up when you position the cursor over an object or an
icon in a particular active widow or toolbar. Available Tool Tip options depend on the type of
window that is active when you access the Tool Tip tab.
- VSD Tool Tip options
- Base Map Tool Tip options
- SynPAK Tool Tip options
- Log Editor Tool Tip options
If there is overlap between two items at the cursor location, only the top item will display a
tool tip.

VSD Tool Tip options

In an active Vertical Seismic Display window, choose Project > User Preferences to open
the User Preferences dialog box. In the User Preferences dialog box, click the Tool Tip tab,
in which you can select items to display in a tool tip when the cursor is placed on an object. If
there is overlap between two items at the cursor location, the tool tip will display only for the
top item.

92 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

• Enable Tool Tip in Vertical Views (vertical windows), when checked, allows selection
of items specific to vertical objects to display within a tool tip when the cursor is placed on
the object.
• Horizons, Faults, and Grids (vertical windows) selects items specific to horizons,
faults, and grids to display within a tool tip when the cursor is placed on the horizon, fault,
or grid. Review these items in the Properties tab of the Horizon, Fault Surface or Grid
Management dialog boxes.
- Type, when checked, displays Horizon, Fault, or Grid.
- Name, when checked, displays the horizon, fault surface, or grid name.
- Label Name, when checked, displays the horizon, fault surface, or grid label. If the
Name and the Label Name are the same, only the Name displays.
- Measured Depth, when checked, displays the measured depth at the cursor location
on the VSD.

• Wells (vertical windows) selects items specific to wells to display within a tool tip when
the cursor is placed on the well. Review these items in the Edit Well Data dialog box.
- Type, when checked, displays Well.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 93

User Preferences

- Well List Selected Items, when checked, displays the items chosen in the Well List
of the User Preferences dialog box.
- End Depth, when checked, displays the total depth (TD) of the well.
• Tops (vertical windows) selects items specific to formation tops to display within a tool
tip when the cursor is placed on the top. Review these items in the Properties tab of the
Formation Top Management dialog box.
- Type, when checked, displays Top.
- Name, when checked, displays the formation top name.
- Abbreviation, when checked, displays the formation top abbreviation.
- Depth, when checked, displays the formation top depth (with depth type in
parenthesis).

Synthetics
• Type, when checked, displays Synthetic.
• Name, when checked, displays the synthetic name.
• TD Chart Name, when checked, displays time-depth chart used in creating Synthetic.
• Display Delay: specifies the time, in seconds, the cursor must remain over the location
before annotation occurs.
• Reset returns dialog box to the default settings.

94 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

Base Map Tool Tip options

Project > User Preferences > Tool Tip tab
In the User Preferences dialog box, click the Tool Tip tab, in which you can select items to
display in a tool tip when the cursor is placed on an object. If there is overlap between two
items at the cursor location, the tool tip will display only for the top item.

Enable Tool Tip in Map Views (Base Map)—turn on to display the desired parameter(s) in a
tool tip when the cursor is placed on a Fault, Fault Polygon, Planimeter Polygon, Culture
Group or 2D Survey.
- Type—select to display in the Tool Tip window the Type of object over which the
cursor is positioned. For Faults, the name Fault Surface or Fault Segment will be
displayed in the Tool Tip.
- Name—select to display in the Tool Tip window the name of the Fault Surface or
Fault Segment. If the fault surface is unassigned, then Unassigned displays also.
- Label Name—select to display in the Tool Tip window the name of the Fault Surface
Label. In the case of assigned faults, only the Name displays if Name and Label
Name are the same.
• Display Delay—enter (type) a value in Seconds that the cursor must remain over an
object before the Tool Tip appears.
• Reset—returns parameter values in the dialog box to the default settings.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 95

User Preferences

96 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

SynPAK Tool Tip options

In an active SynPAK window, choose Project > User Preferences to open the User
Preferences dialog box. In the User Preferences dialog box, click the Tool Tip tab, in which
you can select items to display in a tool tip when the cursor is placed on the perimeter of the
solid portion of the synthetic.

Enable Tool Tip in Map Views (Base Map)—turn on to display the desired parameter(s) in a
tool tip when the cursor is placed on a Fault, Fault Polygon, Planimeter Polygon, Culture
Group or 2D Survey.
- Type—select to display in the Tool Tip window the Type of object over which the
cursor is positioned. For Faults, the name Fault Surface or Fault Segment will be
displayed in the Tool Tip.
- Name—select to display in the Tool Tip window the name of the Fault Surface or
Fault Segment. If the fault surface is unassigned, then Unassigned displays also.
- Label Name—select to display in the Tool Tip window the name of the Fault Surface
Label. In the case of assigned faults, only the Name displays if Name and Label
Name are the same.
• Display Delay—enter (type) a value in Seconds that the cursor must remain over an
object before the Tool Tip appears.
• Reset—returns parameter values in the dialog box to the default settings.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 97

User Preferences

Log Editor Tool Tip options

In an active Log Editor window, choose Project > User Preferences to open the User
Preferences dialog box. In the User Preferences dialog box, click the Tool Tip tab, in which
you can select items to display in a tool tip when the cursor is placed on a Formation Top
displayed in a Log Editor window or view.

98 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

Enable Tool Tip in Log Editor Views (Log Editor windows)—Select to enable the display of
tool tips in Log Editor windows.
Log Editor Formation Tops—Select the desired Formation Top parameter(s) to display in a
tool tip when the cursor is placed on the displayed formation top.
- Type—select to display the word Top indicating the object that the tool tip identifies is
a Formation Top.
- Name—select to display the name of the Formation Top.
- Abbreviation—select to display the abbreviation for the name of the Formation Top.

- Display Delay: specifies the time, in seconds, the cursor must remain over the item
before annotation occurs.
- Reset returns dialog box to the default settings.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 99

User Preferences

Display Features for Wells

Project > User Preferences > Wells tab
In the User Preferences dialog box, use the Wells tab to control the basic display features
associated with wells.

Dialog box items include:

Well Deviations (base map windows) controls the thickness of lines marking borehole
deviations in annotation units. The well deviation lines are displayed in base map view.
Deviations and side tracts show up in base maps as “Spider Plots”. The default is 0.03
inches or 0.08 centimeters.
Well Symbol Size (vertical windows) controls the well symbol size in annotation units.
The well symbols appear the top of vertical slices. The default is 0.15 inches or 0.38
centimeters.
Wellbore (vertical windows) controls the thickness in annotation units of the line
representing the borehole in vertical seismic windows. The default is 0.03 inches or 0.08
centimeters.
Formation Top Thickness (vertical windows) controls the thickness in annotation units
of the line representing all formation tops. The default is 0.03 inches or 0.08 centimeters.
Fault Cut Thickness (vertical windows) controls the thickness in annotation units of the
line representing all fault cuts. The default is 0.03 inches or 0.08 centimeters.
Depth Type (feet/meters)—select the desired option to display depth values referenced
to a specific datum.

Note: A well must have an Elevation Reference and an Elevation value before the
following depth types can be displayed:

100 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

- MD—measured depth or total length of the bore hole measured in feet or meters from
the Elevation Reference.
- TVD(Elev. Ref)—true vertical depth (measured in feet or meters) of a point in the
subsurface with respect to the Elevation Reference. Points of measured depth along
the bore of a straight or deviated well are converted to true vertical depth for purposes
of mapping structure and fluid contacts. In vertical wells, TVD(Elev. Ref) values are
the same as MD values.
- TVD(Seismic)—true vertical depth (measured in feet or meters) of a point in the
subsurface with respect to the seismic datum.
TVD(Seismic) value = TVD(Elev. Ref) value – Elevation + Seismic datum elevation
value.
- Subsea—true vertical depth (measured in feet or meters) of a point in the subsurface
below sea level.
Subsea depth value = Elevation—the elevation (in feet or meters) of a reference point
(KB, DF or GL) above sea level.Elevation value – TVD(Elev. Ref)
Reset button reverts to the system defaults.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 101

User Preferences

Well List
Project > User Preferences > Wells List tab
In the User Preferences dialog box, use the Wells List tab to select the items to display in a
well list. The items will be concatenated in the order they are selected.

Note: The well list in Well Explorer is independent of the User Preferences. Your selection in
this dialog box does not affect the well list in Well Explorer.

Dialog box items include:

• Available Well Information displays a list of the well information that may be displayed
when viewing well lists. The items include: Lease, Operator, UWI, Well Name, and Well
Number. Click the item to place it in the list.
• Selected Well Information displays each of the selected well items. The items may be
dragged and dropped in any particular order. The wells will be sorted according to this
order. The default is Well Name, Well Number, UWI, and Operator.

Tip: Click and drag the item to change the order.

• Reset button reverts to the system defaults.

102 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 User Preferences

Wiggle options
Project > User Preferences > Wiggle Options tab
In the User Preferences dialog box, use the Wiggle Options tab to specify the appearance
of the wiggle variable area type of plot for vertical windows.

The Wiggle Options tab contains the following elements:

Wiggle Trace Color controls the color of the wiggle trace itself. Use the down arrow to
select a color from the color palette. The default is black.
Peak Fill Color controls the color of the positive components of the trace. These are the
values to the right to the zero-crossing line. Use the down arrow to select a color from the
color palette. The default is black.
Trough Fill Color controls the color of controls the color of the negative components of
the trace. These are the values to the left of the zero-crossing line. Use the down arrow to
select a color from the color palette. The default is blue.
Reset button reverts to the system defaults.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 103

License Status/Feature Key maintenance

License Status/Feature Key maintenance

From the Kingdom main window menu, choose Project > License Status to monitor your
current network or standalone licenses. You can also access the license status from the
Kingdom Software Start Page.
• Network License Status
• Standalone License Status

Network License Status

.

104 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 License Status/Feature Key maintenance

The network License Status dialog box contains the following elements:
• The License Usage Tree—displayed on the left side of the License Status dialog box
and shows the Features or products available, Versions available, and User IDs of
individuals who currently have a license checked out. In the figure above, the network
license has one license available which is in use.
Use the scroll bar to navigate in the window and view the entire License Usage Tree.
Click a particular product name to reveal the versions of the product that are available.
Click the plus (+) sign adjacent to the product version number to reveal a list of users who
have licenses checked out.
• Base features to start Kingdom Software—displays the Features available at your site.
- Feature Name: A license from one of the Base Features is required as the principal
program for the Kingdom session. The Base Feature will determine the combination
of options that are made available in the Kingdom session.Click the radio button
adjacent to the Base Feature you wish to use in your Kingdom session.
- Available Licenses—is the number of license not in use on the network at this time.
- Total Licenses—is the total combination of license on the network for each base
product. This number reflects the total count for All Versions of the base product.
• Server Information — lists information about the License Server system used for the
Kingdom session
- Server Name—the logical name of the computer where the license server resides.
- IP—an address of a computer or other network device on a network using TCP/IP
protocol. TCP/IP consists of two separate protocols, TCP and IP, which are used
together. IP is a unique digital computer address that allows an internet computer to
send a packet of digital information to another internet computer. The Transmission
Control Protocol ensures the reliability of the digital data across internet-connected
networks.
• Feature Information—information displayed is about the item highlighted in the License
Usage Tree.
- Feature Name—list the program name associated with the highlighted item.
- Version—the version release number of the highlighted item.
- Starts On—the date the a license is issued for the highlighted item.
- Expires On—the date the license will expire for the highlighted item.
- Number of License in Use—the number of license that are currently checked out
from the Network License Server for the highlighted item.
- Total Number of License—the total number of licenses available on the Network
Server for the highlighted item.
• User Information
- User/Machine Name—the User ID and Computer name associated with the item
highlighted in the License Usage Tree.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 105

License Status/Feature Key maintenance

- Check out time—the time the user checked out the license associated with the item
highlighted in the License Usage Tree.

Standalone License Status

From the Kingdom main menu select Project > License Status. Select the Feature
Information tab to view current licenses and dates.
For detailed information on installing the network or standalone feature key codes, please
refer to the Kingdom Installation Guide.

Kingdom Base features

The primary base features of Kingdom Software the following:
Geophysics and Geology (Core or Advanced) is a base seismic interpretation system
which supports both 2D and 3D seismic data. Interpreters can interpret inlines and
crossline and arbitrary lines. The Geology module is completely integrated with the
seismic interpretation.
Geophysics (Core or Advanced) is a base seismic interpretation system which only
supports 2D and 3D seismic data.
Geology (Core or Advanced) is a geological interpretation and field management tool
that creates a very flexible platform on any scale, from regional exploration to detailed
reservoir characterization. Display log curves in structure/stratigraphic cross-sections
with shading based on a constant cut-off value or based on a facies log curve or
crossover shading.
LoadPAK has import capabilities without the interpretation capabilities. LoadPAK has all
the functionality necessary to import and view well data, 2D and 3D seismic surveys, and
culture information.

106 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Sessions

Sessions
From the Kingdom main window menu, choose Project > Session to display the Session
menu.
A Session is a collection of displayed windows and specified parameter values that have
been saved with one specific name by an author. You can open a project session when you
are opening the project (when this option is selected under User Preferences), or you can
open a different session if the session was saved by you from the same project.
You cannot open another author’s session file. Session files are authored to protect visibility
and other settings that you have chosen from being changed or altered by another user.
The following options are offered on the Session menu:

Open Session Opens the Open Session file dialog box in which you can retrieve
a previously saved session.
To open a previously saved session when you are opening the
project, the Open projects using a Session File option on the
Startup Options tab in the User Preferences dialog box must be
selected.

Close Session Closes all windows after presenting the choice to save the current
session. The Project Explorer remains open.

Save Session Saves the active windows, settings, and screen locations to the
current session name.

Save Session As Opens the Save Session File dialog box in which you can save the
current windows, settings, and screen locations to a new session
name.

Delete Session Opens the Delete Session File dialog box removes saved session
names from the database. All interpretation remains unchanged.

Save Session Always Prompt—click to always display a prompt to save the

Prompt current session upon exit.
Always Save—click to always save the current session upon exit.
Never Save—click to never save the current session upon exit.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 107

Sessions

Open Session file

From the Kingdom main window menu, choose Project > Session > Open Session to open
the Open Session File dialog box.

Note: To open a previously saved session when you are opening the project, the Open
projects using a Session File option on the Startup Options tab in the User
Preferences dialog box must be selected.

A Session is a collection of displayed windows and specified parameter values that have
been saved with one specific name by an author. You can open a project session when you
are opening the project (when this option is selected under User Preferences), or you can
open a different session if the session was saved by you from the same project.
You cannot open another author’s session file. Session files are authored to protect visibility
and other settings that you have chosen from being changed or altered by another user.
When opening a new session, a check will run to determine whether the session was saved
on a single-monitor or multiple-monitor workstation.If a session is saved on a multiple-monitor
workstation and then opened on a single-monitor workstation, all windows will be displayed in
the Kingdom initiating monitor.
If a session is saved on a single-monitor workstation and then opened on a multiple-monitor
workstation, all session windows will display in the Kingdom initiating monitor.
If a session is opened after the screen size of a workstation is changed, a message will
display indicating that a screen dimensions change has been detected from the last use of
the session and the session windows have been repositioned to be visible.
The Open Session File dialog box contains the following elements:
Session Files Associated with the Current Tree—lists all session files associated with
the active author. Select a session to view the Session Information.
Browse—click to navigate to the folder that contains the session file if it is not listed in the
panel above. The default is the active author’s directory.
Session Information—displays the session author, available work trees, and the dates
the session was created, last modified, and last accessed.
Select or browse to a session file to open and click OK. Remember that you cannot open
another author’s session file. Session files are authored to protect visibility and other settings
that you have chosen from being changed or altered by another user.

Save Session File

From the Kingdom main window menu, choose Project > Session > Save Session As to
display the Save Session File dialog box. You can save the current session with a new
name, or save the same session to a different location.

Delete Session File

From the Kingdom main menu, choose Project > Session > Delete Session to display the
Delete Session File dialog box.

108 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Sessions

This feature removes the current session from the database.

Note: All interpretation and project information remains unchanged. Only the session
settings are deleted.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 109

Sessions

110 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Kingdom Project Security
Security overview
The Security feature allows you to manage permissions for Windows users in your Kingdom
projects. When logging in to a Kingdom project, users will see only the author names to which
they have permissions.

Warning: Security settings are applied dynamically as they are entered. If you do not want
to apply the selected settings, turn Security status OFF before exiting Security.

This feature is only available for projects with SQL Server or Oracle databases. SQL Server
Express and Access databases are not supported.
This section contains the following topics:
• Security access levels
• Security feature requirements and restrictions
• Set security permissions
The first Windows user to activate the Security feature will have Project Administrator
permissions.
As administrator, before you can begin setting access permissions for specific users, you
must assign a default permission for everyone else. Everyone else can be given all author
access or no access.

Scenario 1: Most users have Select All Authors as the

full access. Restrict project Default access. Specific users,
access to select individuals such as consultants, will later
only. be assigned to specific authors.

Scenario 2: Most users have Select No Authors as the

limited access. Allow full Default access. Specific users
project access to select will later be assigned an access
individuals only. level.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 111

Security access levels

Security access levels

Users are assigned to one of the following levels of project access:

Access level Permissions

Project Administrator The Project Administrator has full access to the project and the
Security tool and is the only role that can change Security
settings. A project can have more than one project administrator.

All authors Users with All author access can log in as any author in the
project and can perform any action in Kingdom with the exception
of viewing or changing the Security settings.

Specific authors Users can log in to the project as the specified author(s) only but
can still view and copy other authors’ interpretations.

No access These users will not be able to log in to the project as any author.

112 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Security feature requirements and restrictions

Security feature requirements and restrictions

The Security feature:
• requires a Kingdom Advanced license.
• will not appear in the Project menu until you obtain a Kingdom Advanced license.
• is only available to Kingdom projects with Oracle or SQL Server databases.
• is NOT available for Kingdom projects with Access or SQL Server Express databases.
Security will not appear in the Project menu if your current project database is SQL
Server Express or Access.
• will have NO effect on Kingdom projects in pre-8.3 versions.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 113

Set security permissions

Set security permissions

Project > Security
The first Windows user to activate the Security feature will have Project Administrator
permissions.
As administrator, before you can begin setting access permissions for specific users, you
must assign a default permission for everyone else. Everyone else can be given all author
access or no access.

Scenario 1: Most users have Select All Authors as the

full access. Restrict project Default access. Specific users,
access to select individuals such as consultants, will later
only. be assigned to specific authors.

Scenario 2: Most users have Select No Authors as the

limited access. Allow full Default access. Specific users
project access to select will later be assigned an access
individuals only. level.

1. Launch the Security tool through the Project menu. From Kingdom, select Project >
Security to open the Security dialog box.

Note: If Security does not appear in the Project menu, see Security feature
requirements and restrictions.

2. Activate the Security feature. Click the OFF button at the top of the Security dialog box.

Note: If you turn off the Security feature after project access levels have been set for
specific users, the security settings will be saved and can be turned on at a later
date.

114 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Set security permissions

3. Assign a default level of access for everyone else. Available default access levels are:
• All Authors—in this scenario, the majority of users are allowed full access to all
authors in the project but specific users, such as consultants, will later be assigned to
specific authors.
• No Access—in this scenario, most users are denied access to the project. Only
select users will be allowed access.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 115

Set security permissions

4. Find users. Search for and select specific users that will be assigned a level of access
different from the default level.
a. Search for users in your active directory by entering one of the following fields in the
Search field:
- Display Name: John Smith
- Windows ID: jsmith
- Email: [email protected]
The application will return a list of all valid users that match the input data.
b. From the returned list of users, select single or multiple names and click Add. The
selected users will be displayed in the Set Access Level section.
c. Repeat as required.
5. Set an Access Level for selected users. Access levels are described in the Security
overview.
a. Select a user and then select an Access level for that user. Access levels must be
assigned one user at a time.
b. For specific authors only access, a list of available authors in the project displays to
the right of the list of access levels. Select the desired author(s).
c. In the Effective Permissions table, each user/author combination is listed.
6. Review Effective Permissions. As you assign a level of access for each user, the
information is listed in the Effective Permissions table at the bottom of the dialog box.
7. Edit permissions as required.
a. Select the user/author row in the Effective Permissions table. If the user has only one
entry in the Effective Permissions table, you can just select the name from the list of
users under Set Access Level.
b. Select a new access level. The user’s information in the Effective Permissions table
will update.
c. If the user is to have the default level of access, click the x in the Remove column
beside the user’s name.

116 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Project Explorer
Project Explorer is the primary project management tool for your Kingdom projects. With it
you can browse, locate, and organize the contents of your Kingdom projects. The Project
Explorer is comprised of the navigation pane on the left and the content pane on the right.
The navigation pane shows either the Project Inventory or a custom collection and the
content pane shows whatever items are in the selected folder in the navigation pane.
The Project Explorer also determines what items are visible in all views and available in
Kingdom dialog boxes. Selecting the check box next to an item makes that item visible and
clearing the check box hides the item. Those items selected as visible comprise the working
set of items in a Kingdom project.
To display a surface (fault, grid, or horizon) on the base map, simply click on the item and
drag to the base map.

Project Inventory
The Project Inventory is a complete listing of all data and objects included in a Kingdom
project. These items are organized in folders by data type (faults, formation tops, surveys,
horizons, grids, control point sets, etc.) These folders are called typed folders because they
can contain only item types corresponding to the name of the folder. For example, the
Surveys folder can only contain surveys. For more information, see Understanding the
Project Inventory and Custom Collections.

Custom Collections
Custom collections are subsets of the Project Inventory that contain links to only those items
from the Project Inventory chosen by the author who created the collection. Authors can
create as many custom collections as needed. For more information, see Creating Custom
Collections.

Subfolders
Like the Project Inventory, custom collections use typed folders. Within typed folders, you can
also create subfolders as a way to further organize the contents of your project. You can
create as many subfolders as you need in a typed folder. You cannot create subfolders within
subfolders.

Item linking
It is important to note that custom collections contain only links to items in the Project
Inventory. They do not contain copies of the original items from the Project Inventory and
adding an item to a custom collection does not move that item from the Project Inventory into
the custom collection. Linking to the Project Inventory ensures that any updates made to an
item are available in any custom collection that has a link to that item. Linking also provides a
measure of safety against accidentally deleting items from the project. Removing an item
from a custom collection only deletes the link to the item, not the item itself. The original item
remains in the Project Inventory. The only way to delete an item from a project is to delete it
from the Project Inventory.

Related topics

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 117

 Using Project Explorer
Understanding the Project Inventory and Custom Collections
Creating Custom Collections
Maintaining Custom Collections
Maintaining the Project Inventory

118 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Using Project Explorer

Using Project Explorer

The Project Explorer contains the navigation pane on the left and a content pane on the right.
The navigation pane shows only the active collection, which is either the Project Inventory or
a custom collection. To select the active collection, click the name of the collection in the
Collection list you want to display.
The active collection is the set of objects available for you to work with in your project. You
can further refine what is available for use within the active collection by selecting or clearing
the display check box next to individual items or folders. Clearing the check box for an item

hides the item from displaying in any views or dialog boxes. You can use the Select All

and Clear All buttons to select or clear all the items within a folder. You can also select
or clear the check box next to a folder to hide all the items in a folder or display any items in
that folder selected for display. The items marked as visible in the active collection comprise
the current working set for the project.
To simplify the display and reduce the size of the Project Explorer window, you can collapse
the navigation pane to a vertical bar on the left side of the Project Explorer window. The bar is
labeled with the name of the selected folder in the navigation pane to help you identify
your location.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 119

Using Project Explorer

1—Navigation Bar
2—Manage Menu
3—Author List
4—Collection List
5—Visibility
6—Sort Options
7—Search
8—Navigation Pane
9—Content Pane

Related topics
Navigating the Project Explorer
Viewing project content
Viewing content from other authors
Sorting the Project Explorer
Searching the Project Explorer

Navigating the Project Explorer

The top of the Project Explorer window contains a navigation bar indicating your location in
the Project Explorer. You can click on any level in the navigation bar to display that level of
the project in the contents pane. The navigation bar is particularly useful for finding content
when you collapse the navigation pane.

Related topics
Using Project Explorer
Viewing project content

120 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Using Project Explorer

Viewing content from other authors

Sorting the Project Explorer
Searching the Project Explorer

Viewing project content

You can drag and drop certain items from the project explorer onto the base map:
• Contours
• Faults
• Grids
• Horizons
You can also double-click these same items to display them in a new base map window.
You can drag and drop surveys and wells onto VSDs (you cannot drag them onto a base
map).
When you double-click a horizon or fault, the available data types for the horizon or fault
display in the contents pane. Double-click the data type to display it in a new base map
window or drag and drop the data type onto the current base map window.
Double-clicking other items in the content pane opens the management dialog box for that
item type. This includes:
• Culture
• Fault Cuts
• Formation tops
• PAKNotes
• Picked Intervals
• Polygons
• Surveys
• Traces
• Wavelets/Filters
When you double-click a control point set, this opens an edit dialog where you can modify the
control points.
When you double-click a well, this displays the list of boreholes for that well in the content
pane. Double-click a borehole to see folders for any items related to that borehole, such as
log curves, T-D charts, and synthetics.

Note: To display the Edit Well Data dialog box, click the Edit Well icon or right-click the
well and select Edit > Well Data.

Double-clicking a folder in the navigation pane opens the management dialog box for that
item type. For example, double-clicking the Horizons folder opens the Horizon Management
dialog box.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 121

Using Project Explorer

Related topics
Using Project Explorer
Navigating the Project Explorer
Viewing content from other authors
Sorting the Project Explorer
Searching the Project Explorer

Viewing content from other authors

You can view items in the Kingdom project created by other authors. To display content from
other authors, click the Author list and select the check box next to the name of the author(s)
you want to include.
Content from other authors is read-only. You cannot modify items created by other authors.
You can, however, right-click another author’s item and select Copy to make an editable copy
of the item.
The availability of content from other authors depends on whether the Project Inventory or a
custom collection is the active collection. When the Project Inventory is the active collection,
you can view and copy content from any other author in the project. For custom collections
that you create by digitizing a polygon on the base map, any content from other authors
bounded by that polygon is available in the custom collection. For custom collections you
create manually, only content from other authors that you specifically add is available in the
collection.

Related topics
Using Project Explorer
Navigating the Project Explorer
Viewing project content
Sorting the Project Explorer
Searching the Project Explorer

Sorting the Project Explorer

You can sort folders and items in the Project Explorer by the following:
• Author name
• Item name
• Visibility
• Item Type
You can sort in ascending or descending order.

Related topics
Using Project Explorer
Navigating the Project Explorer
Viewing project content
Viewing content from other authors
Searching the Project Explorer

122 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Using Project Explorer

Searching the Project Explorer

You can use the Search field to search the Project Explorer for content by item name. To
search a folder, select the folder in the navigation pane. To search an entire collection, click
on the name of the collection in the navigation bar. The search supports partial matches. It
does not support wild cards.

Related topics
Navigating the Project Explorer
Viewing project content
Viewing content from other authors
Sorting the Project Explorer

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 123

Understanding the Project Inventory and Custom Collections

Understanding the Project Inventory and Custom

Collections
The Project Inventory is a master inventory of all the items in your project. Custom collections
are user-defined, highly configurable subsets of the Project Inventory. Custom collections are
authored and each author can create as many custom collections as needed. When you
create new items or import items, such as horizons, grids, surveys, or wells, in a custom
collection, those items are also added to the Project Inventory.
Although similar, the Project Inventory and custom collections have some important
differences. The table below provides a summary of these differences.

Activity Project Inventory Custom Collections

Add Items • Creating new items • Creating new items

• Importing data into the • Copying or adding from the
project Project Inventory or other
collections and authors)

Add Subfolders No Yes

Remove Item Links Not applicable Yes

Delete Items Yes No (collections contain only

links to items)

Delete Subfolders No Yes

Duplicate Items No No

Duplicate Subfolders No Yes

For more information about custom collections, see Creating Custom Collections.

124 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Creating Custom Collections

Creating Custom Collections

A custom collection is a subset of items from the Project Inventory that you create and
customize to suit your particular needs. You cannot place items in a custom collection that
are not already in the Project Inventory. There is no limit to the number of custom collections
you can create and each custom collection contains only those items from the Project
Inventory that you choose to include. Custom collections are similar to the work trees
available in earlier versions of the Project Explorer.

Understanding links
When you add items to a custom collection, rather than placing a copy of the item in the
custom collection you are actually placing a link to the original item in the Project Inventory.
Creating links has the advantages of avoiding unnecessary duplication of data and ensuring
that items in every custom collection remain current with any changes to the original items.
For example, if you make updates to a horizon or grid, those updates are immediately
available in the Project Inventory and any custom collection that contains a link to the original
horizon or grid.

Adding related items

When you add items to a custom collection from the Project Inventory or another custom
collection, Kingdom also adds any related items from the Project Inventory to the custom
collection. For example, if you add a horizon to a custom collection, Kingdom also adds any
seismic surveys associated with that horizon. If you add a well, Kingdom adds any tops
associated with that well.
There are several ways to create a collection in the Project Explorer:
• Digitizing On The Base Map
• Manually creating a collection
• Copying a collection
To create a new custom collection, click Manage and then click the method you want to use
to create the collection.

Digitizing On The Base Map

You can create a new custom collection by digitizing a new polygon on the base map or by
selecting an existing polygon. When you create a custom collection by digitizing, you also
have the option to select what kinds of items you want to include from the Project Inventory.
To create a new custom collection by digitizing on the base map:
1. In Project Explorer, select either the Project Inventory or the collection you want to use as
the starting point for the new collection in the Collection list.
2. Click Manage > New from polygon.
3. In the Items to include list, select All to include all items in the Project Inventory or
Visible Only to include only those items that are currently marked as visible (the working
set).

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 125

Creating Custom Collections

4. Select the different types of data you want to include in your collection (by default all
options are selected):

Note: When you create a custom collection by digitizing on the base map, any
formation tops inside the polygon are not included in the custom collection.
You must add these manually once you create the collection.

5. If you want to select items for your new collection based on an existing polygon, select
the polygon you want to use from the Select polygon list.
6. If you want to digitize a new polygon on your base map:
a. click Digitize
b. Type a name for the new polygon and then click OK.
c. Digitize the polygon on the base map.
7. If you want to use an existing polygon as the basis for the custom collection, select the
polygon you want from the Select polygon list.
8. In the Collection name field accept the polygon name as the collection name or type a
name for the new collection.
9. If you want to make the new collection the active collection, select the Set as active
collection check box. This option is selected by default.
10. Click OK to save your new collection.
The new collection contains all the items located within the bounds of the polygon you
selected or digitized, including items created by other authors. The contents of the collection
is automatically organized into typed folders.

Related topics
Creating Custom Collections

Manually creating a collection

You can create a new custom collection by manually defining the items from the Project
Inventory or another custom collection that you want to be in the new custom collection. To
add items to your collection, you select the files you want and move the files to the new
collection.
When you add items to a new collection, Kingdom automatically creates folders in the new
collection based on item type. For example, if you add surveys to a new collection, Kingdom
creates a Surveys folder and places the surveys in this folder. You can only place items in a
folder that match the type for the folder. For example, you can only place surveys in the
Surveys folder.
To manually create a new collection:
1. On the Project Explorer menu, click Manage > New manually.
2. In the Source field, select the source for the new collection. This can be the Project
Inventory or a custom collection.

126 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Creating Custom Collections

3. If you want to add the entire contents of the selected source to the new collection, click
Add All, and then proceed to Step 9. Otherwise, continue to the remaining steps.
4. In the source collection, click a folder containing items you want to add to the new
collection.

5. If you want to add the entire contents of the selected folder, click . Otherwise,

select the items you want to add, and then click .

6. If you want to create a subfolder within a typed folder in the new collection, click and
then type the name of the subfolder. You can add items to a subfolder by:
• Dragging and dropping items from the source collection to the new collection (creates
a new link in the target collection).

• Selecting a source folder or items and then clicking or . This adds

items to the root of the typed folder. You must then drag and drop items to the
subfolder you want.
• Dragging and dropping items from another folder in the new collection to a subfolder
(moves the items from one folder to another).
• Selecting the items you want to copy in the new collection, pressing the Ctrl key, and
dragging the items to a new subfolder or root folder (creates a copy of the items in the
target folder).
7. Repeat Steps 4 through 6 as applicable for each folder in the source collection containing
items you want to add to the new collection.
8. If you want to make the new collection the active collection, select the Set as active
collection check box. This option is selected by default.
9. In the Collection name field, type the name of the new collection, and then click OK.

Related topics
Creating Custom Collections

Copying a collection
You can create a new collection by copying a custom collection you created or one created
by another author. When you copy a collection, this adds a new collection to Kingdom with
the same name as the collection you copied and the text “_Copy” appended to the name.
This new collection contains all the same files as the original collection you are copying. You
can rename the collection if necessary. You can also modify the contents of the collection just
as you would if you were creating a collection manually.
To copy a collection:
1. On the Project Explorer menu, click Manage > New from author.
2. In the Authors list, click the name of the author whose collection you want to copy (you
can select yourself as an author).

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 127

Creating Custom Collections

3. In the Select collections list, select the collection(s) you want to copy.
4. Click OK.
Kingdom creates the new collection(s) with “_Copy” appended to the original collection
name. To display a copied collection, select it in the Collection list.
If necessary, make any changes to folders or the contents of folders within the collection. For
more information about modifying a collection, see Maintaining Custom Collections.

Related topics
Creating Custom Collections

128 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Maintaining Custom Collections

Maintaining Custom Collections

Once you create a custom collection, you can add, copy, and remove items, create and
delete subfolders, and move items between folders in the collection. You can maintain the
currently active collection while using it or you can edit the active collection by selecting
Manage > Edit from the menu and opening the Edit Collection window. You can perform
most editing functions using either of these two options. To add subfolders, however, you
must select Manage > Edit from the menu.
The Edit Collection window works the same way as the create Collection window. For more
information about creating collections manually, see Manually creating a collection. The
remainder of these topics discuss maintaining a collection while using it.
You can also delete custom collections. Since collections contain links to items in the Project
Inventory, deleting a collection only deletes the links. The original items remain in the project
inventory.

New data and dynamic subsets

Other than changes you make yourself, custom collections are static. That is, any new data
added to the Project Inventory is not automatically added to any custom collections. If you
want the new data, you must add it to a custom collection yourself.
If your custom collection contains any dynamic subsets (for example, wells and surveys),
these subsets remain dynamic, but only for content in the custom collection. Any data added
to the Project Inventory that meets the criteria for a dynamic subset in a custom collection is
not added to the collection. Any new data added to the Project Inventory must be added
manually to a custom collection.

Tip: An easy way to update dynamic subsets in a custom collection is to add the subset to
the custom collection again. Doing so adds any new data in the Project Inventory that
meets the criteria of the dynamic subset to the custom collection.

Related topics
Adding Items to a Custom Collection
Adding subfolders
Removing items and subfolders
Maintaining the Project Inventory

Adding Items to a Custom Collection

You can add items to a custom collection the following ways:
• Copying items from the Project Inventory or another collection
• Creating new items such as horizons, grids, faults, control point sets, etc.
• Copying items in the same collection
• Importing culture files, faults, grids, horizons, surveys, and wells
In most cases, when you create new items in a custom collection, these items are also added
to the Project Inventory. The one exception to this is creating a copy of an unauthored item,

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 129

Maintaining Custom Collections

such as a well or survey. When you copy unauthored items, you create a new link in the
collection to the original item in the Project Inventory, but no new item is added to the Project
Inventory.
You can also import the following items into a custom collection:
• control point sets
• culture files
• faults
• grids
• horizons
• surveys
• wells

Adding items
To add items to a collection from another collection:
1. Make the Project Inventory or the collection containing the item you want to add the active
collection.
2. Right click the folder or item(s) you want to add to a collection.
3. Click Add to collection, and then click the name of the collection where you want to add
items. When you add a folder to a collection, this also adds the entire contents of the
folder.
When you add items to a custom collection, they are added to the appropriate folder by item
type. For example, if you add a grid to a custom collection, it is added to the Grids folder. You
cannot add a different item type to the Grids folder. If the folder for an item type does not exist
when you add an item to a custom collection, Kingdom creates the folder for you
automatically.
Items you add are always added to the typed folder. You must drag and drop new items if you
want to put them in a subfolder.

Copying items
To copy items in a collection, right-click the item you want to copy, and then click Copy. This
creates a copy of the item in the root folder with the suffix“- Copy” appended to the file name.
This copy is authored by the currently logged in user. If you want to rename the copied file,
select the file and then press F2.
In most cases, when you copy items in a custom collection, these copied items are also
added to the Project Inventory. The one exception to this is creating a copy of an unauthored
item, such as a well or survey. When you copy unauthored items, you create a new link in the
collection to the original item in the Project Inventory, but no new item is added to the Project
Inventory.
You can have more than one copy of the same item in a custom collection, although item
names must be unique within a typed folder or subfolder for the same author. Items can have
the same name in the same typed folder or subfolder if they have different authors.

130 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Maintaining Custom Collections

Importing items
To import items, right click the folder for the item type you want to import in the navigation
pane, and then click Import. For more information about importing data into your project, see
Data Import and Export.

Adding subfolders
You can add subfolders to the typed folders in a custom collection. You cannot add
subfolders to the typed folders in the Project Inventory. You can create as many subfolders as
you want within a typed folder. You cannot create subfolders within another subfolder.
To add subfolders to a custom collection:
1. Make the custom collection where you want to add a subfolder the active collection.
2. Click Manage > Edit.

3. Click next to the folder where you want to create a subfolder.

4. Type the name of the subfolder, and then press Enter.

Related topics
Adding Items to a Custom Collection
Removing items and subfolders
Maintaining the Project Inventory

Moving items
To move items between subfolders in a custom collection, select the items you want to move
and then drag and drop them to the new location.

Removing items and subfolders

To remove an item or a subfolder from a custom collection, right-click the item or folder and
select Remove from collection. Since custom collections only contain links to items,
removing an item in a custom collection removes the link to the original item in the Project
Inventory. The original item remains in the project and is available in the Project Inventory
and any other collection containing a link to the original item. Removing a folder from a
custom collection removes all the links in the folder to items in the Project Inventory.

Deleting Collections
You can delete custom collections. Since collections contain links to items in the Project
Inventory, deleting a collection only deletes the links. The original items remain in the Project
Inventory.
To delete a collection:
1. Click Manage > Delete to open the Delete Collection dialog box.
2. Select the collection you want to delete from the list, and then click Delete. You cannot
delete the active collection.

Related topics

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 131

Maintaining Custom Collections

Adding Items to a Custom Collection

Adding subfolders
Maintaining the Project Inventory

Managing item properties

To open the Properties tab of the Management dialog box for an item, right-click the item and
Select Properties from the menu. For some items, you can also double-click the item to open
the Properties tab of the Management dialog box.

Displaying items on the Base Map

To display an item on the base map, click and drag it onto the base map. For grids, you can
double-click the item. For horizons and faults, double-click the item to display the available
data types, then double-click or drag onto the base map the data type you want to display.

132 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Maintaining the Project Inventory

Maintaining the Project Inventory

Right-click options on most data type folders include the following:

Turn on all Turns all items on in Project Explorer.

Turn off all Turns all items off in Project Explorer.

Add to collection Adds all items in the selected folder to a collection.

Manage Opens the Management dialog box for the selected data
type.Double-clicking on the folder does the same.

Import Launches the Import or Export Wizard for most data types.
See Data Import and Export for details.

Export Fault cuts and formation tops can only be exported through
the well export.

Right-click options vary by data type. Options are self-explanatory.

Viewing seismic data and horizons with Kingdom Geology

If you have a Kingdom Geology license but not a Geophysics license, you can still view
seismic data and horizons in all views, the base map, vertical sections, and VuPAK, but you
cannot edit the data or import/export. the available tabs in the Survey Management and
Horizon Management dialog boxes are also limited.
This option is enabled by default. To disable this option go to Project > User Preferences >
General.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 133

Legacy Work Trees

Legacy Work Trees

If you have any Kingdom projects with work trees, these work trees are automatically
converted to custom collections when you open the project in Kingdom 2014. Kingdom only
converts the work trees belonging to the currently logged in author. These collections are
available for selection in the Project Explorer in the Collections list.

134 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

The Kingdom Project Architecture
Project file types
With every Kingdom release, more file types are added. The following table lists a few of the
more important file types, especially those that can reside outside of the Kingdom project
folder.
A new installation of Kingdom does not remove older legacy files from older projects. These
are left alone in the event that the project must be opened with older versions of the software.
In that way, backwards-compatibility is maintained unless major schema changes break that
compatibility.
The following versions of Kingdom are not backward compatible:

8.0 Version 8.0 introduced tiled horizon files (*.hzn), replacing the older *.hrz files.

8.2 A new deviation survey table was introduced in Kingdom version 8.2.
Deviation surveys loaded in earlier versions are not visible in later versions.

8.7 New EarthPAK Advanced tables were added to the Kingdom data model to
support the reserves and economics functionality in Kingdom 8.7

2015 Following changes prevented backward compatibility:

• A Blue Marble Library upgrade to bring EPSG compliance to Kingdom
• Removal of support for MS Access database and 32-bit operating systems

The table below lists a few of the more important file types. File Type B = binary. File Type T
= text.

File File
File name File description
Ext. Type

<proj name> .set Project settings. (In main and individual author folders) T

<proj name>_Vu .set VuPAK project settings file. T

<proj name> .tks Project control file. DO NOT DELETE. B

<proj name> .xml Database pointer file containing the connect T

information for the supporting Oracle and SQL-Server
databases

<color bar file .clb When Kingdom is initially installed, a default set of color T
name> bars is loaded in the Colorbars folder. The default path
for this folder is: C:\Program
Files\KingdomSuite\Colorbars. We recommend that
you copy this folder to a safe storage area. If any of the
color bars become corrupted, simply delete the old
colorbar folder and replace it with a new folder.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 135

 File File
File name File description
Ext. Type

s<survey id> .sur Survey coordinate file for each 2D and 3D survey B

Seismic survey and data files:

s<survey id> .sur Survey coordinate file for each 2D and 3D survey B

seismic<survey .sdd Seismic data definition file T

id>

seismic<survey .knx Seismic data definition file for Kingdom versions 7.5 B
id> and higher. These files need to be stored with the .ksd
files.

seismic<survey .1 Trace data. These files can be huge depending on the B

id> number for traces, trace length, and sample rate.
.ksd These files can be stored outside the project directory.

tslice<survey id> .1 Trace data for every time or depth slice generated. B
These files can be stored outside the project directory.

Interpretation data files

h<horizon id> .hzn Horizon picks for each horizon in tiled format. This
format is for Kingdom versions 8.0 and higher.

g<grid id> .grd Grid picks for every grid. B

f<fault id> .flt Fault surface file for every fault surface. B

136 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Template files

*.lcs Log curve template file.

*.lpt SEG-Y load template file for bulk importing 2D surveys.

*.spd spreadsheet template file.

*.stp SynPAK template file.

*.tpl Text Reader template file.

*.xtp Crossplot template file.

*.vsw vertical seismic display template file

*.csw cross-section template file

Project data vs authored data

Project data is available to all authors for viewing, editing, and deleting. Project data includes
wells, well logs, seismic data, and culture.
Authored data can only be edited by the author who owns the data. For a list of authored data
types go to Project > Author Management. Then open the Copy tab. Under Select data
category click the down arrow. This list is authored data.

Modifying/Deleting Kingdom project files

Warning: There are three files which should never be deleted from a project. These are the
project (*.tks) file, the Access database (*.mdb) file (if the project was created in
Access), and the <project name>.xml file.

- Other files may be deleted; however, there is the risk of losing data or session
configuration settings. Use caution when removing files from a project via Windows
commands.
- Files that, if deleted, will be regenerated upon project startup include: *.cfg (before
7.4), *.set, *.xml, *.plg, *.knx, and *. Vu.set files.
- Additionally, the geocalc.dat file may be edited by opening the file in Notepad,
WordPad (or Word) and modifying or deleting the cartographic projection information
manually. Once again, exercise caution when changing this file.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 137

File ownership
Every file you see in the top project directory level was created by the project administrator,
or the person who created the project. If that author proceeds to create faults and horizons, or
any other type of interpreted object, the corresponding files will be stored in the top-level
project directory not in an author’s folder.

Tip: It is preferable to create separate authors, for which individual project author
subdirectories will be created, containing the future fault and horizon files. In this
fashion, each subdirectory can have Windows file protection placed on it if necessary.

If using mapped drives, be sure that all users use the same mapping convention for all the
PCs accessing Kingdom projects. For example, if the projects are mapped to K:\ for one
user, then they should be mapped to K:\ for all users.
1. Project folder
a. Interpretation done by the creating author will be stored in the project folder.
b. This folder must be Read/Write for all authors.
c. These files must be Read/Write for all authors.
- Alaska.LAS -- Blue Marble configuration file
- Alaska.LOS -- Blue Marble configuration file
- CONUS.LAS -- Blue Marble configuration file
- CONUS.LOS -- Blue Marble configuration file
- geocalc.dat -- stores reference information on cartographic projection system
- *.bin
- *.cfg (pre-7.4 release)
- *.tks
- *.~lk -- dynamic lock file
- *.sdd
- *.knx
- *.sur
a. The trace *.1 and *.ksd files can be read only after creation (unless the seismic data is
to be modified via Misties or Trace Calculations operations).
b. All other files in the project folder belong to the creating author but must be Read/
Write for the entire group.
2. Author folders
a. Must be read/write for the owning Author and the group.
b. Must be at least read for all Authors.

138 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 c. Can be located anywhere on the network (default location is in the project folder).
3. Log folder (created when needed) must be read/write for all authors.
4. Kingdom software Raster Image folder must be read/write for all authors (created when
needed).

File references in the database

Whether or not specific data types are stored in the database, or out on system files,
references to them exist in the database. Here are a list of data types, and how they are
handled in Kingdom.

DATA TYPE LOCATION DATABASE TABLE

Culture (land grids, etc.) Binary files on disk Path and metadata stored
in table T_CULTURE

Seismic survey metadata ASCII files on disk Path and metadata stored
in table T_SURVEY

Seismic traces Binary files on disk Path and metadata stored

in table T_SEISMICDATA

Images Binary Large OBject inside T_IMAGE

the data base

Digital log curves BLOB inside the database T_LOGDATA

Synthetics BLOB inside the database T_SYNTHETIC

Raster Log (calibrated) BLOB inside the database T_RASTERLOGDATA

Time-Depth BLOB inside the database T_TIMEDEPTHDATA

Borehole Drilling Logs BLOB inside the database T_BHEDRILLLOG

Deviation surveys BLOB inside the database T_DEVIATIONSURVEY

Pointer to raster log images BLOB inside the database T_RASTERIMAGE

Zone interval averages BLOB inside the database T_ZONEINTERVALAV

3D navigation data BLOB inside the database T_SURVEYDATA3D

2D navigation data BLOB inside the database T_SURVEYDATA2D

Comments BLOB inside the database T_COMMENT

Fault surface Inside the database T_SURFACE

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 139

140 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.
Color Names and Codes Table
Introduction
There are sixty-four colors recognized in the Kingdom main window menu bar. The colors are
assigned to objects such as formation tops and fault cuts. If you wish to assign a color to an
object upon import through a text reader, use the following table to create either a color name
column or a color code column.

Color Name Color Code Color Name Color Code

Red 0 LightGoldenrod 33

DarkRed 1 Tomato 34

Black 2 DimGray 35

Gray 3 SlateBlue 36

Blue 4 Orchid 37

Green 5 SpringGreen 38

Yellow 6 LightGold 39

Magenta 7 MediumMagenta 40

Cyan 8 Orangered 41

DarkBlue 9 Sienna 42

DarkGreen 10 DodgerBlue 43

DarkYellow 11 MediumOrchid 44

DarkMagenta 12 LightSpringGreen 45

DarkCyan 13 MediumGoldenrodYellow 46

White 14 LightSalmon 47

LightGray 15 MediumGray 48

Orange 16 DeepSkyBlue 49

Pink 17 LightOrchid 50

Salmon 18 MediumAquamarine 51

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 141

Maroon 19 GoldenrodYellow 52

Violet 20 LightMagenta 53

LightYellow 21 DarkRosyBrown 54

LightGreen 22 Burlywood 55

LightPink 23 Turquoise 56

Brown 24 Plum 57

Gold 25 RosyBrown 58

HotPink 26 Wheat 59

DeepGray 27 LightPlum 60

CadetBlue 28 LavenderBlush 61

Goldenrod 29 LightRosyBrown 62

DeepPink 30 Tan 63

DarkGray 31

VioletRed 32

142 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Troubleshooting Tips
This section includes the following topics:
Recording an Appsight log—The Appsight log helps Kingdom Technical Support to pinpoint
the root cause of an application problem.
Changing virus scan settings to optimize performance—You can optimize Kingdom
performance on your workstation by excluding certain folders from being scanned by your
anti-virus software.
Know your workstation specifications—Kingdom System Information Utility provides a
convenient and effective way to view and send system information to Technical Support.
Database Connection Errors—Get help if you receive an error message when trying to
connect to your Kingdom project database. See more about databases under the Kingdom
Software Help topic Database Administration.
Clean clock tampering—If you get a Clock Tampering message, you will need to contact Tech
Support to resolve the issue. Tech support will send you the required keys.txt file. This
section contains the instructions to apply the new file.

Recording an Appsight log

On occasion, Technical Support may ask you to create a log of your computer’s activity to
help pinpoint the root cause of an application problem. BMC’s AppSight Black Box is
available from the Kingdom Help menu for both 32-bit and 64-bit versions to make this
recording.
AppSight is a software module that operates like a black box flight recorder on a plane. It
monitors application execution, captures a real-time log of application activity, and helps
pinpoint the root cause of application problems quickly and effectively.
Appsight is automatically installed with Kingdom unless during a Custom installation you
choose to deselect Appsight.
AppSight creates two logs:
• a visual log of all activity that occurs on your monitors
• a text log of all activity.
After you record the troubleshooting log, save it and send it to Technical Support for analysis.
To start recording a troubleshooting log, follow these steps:
1. Choose Help > Start Recording.
The Recording Details dialog box appears.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 143

2. Complete the following information to create a header file for the troubleshooting log:
• First name—required.
• Last name—required.
• Company name—optional.
• Incident number—your Technical Support contact will give you an incident number.
• Description of issue—enter a description of what has occurred and what you will
reproduce while in recording mode.
• Kingdom version and build—this field is automatically filled in by Kingdom. It
displays the version and build of Kingdom, including the type of license.
• Save As—contains 2 fields:

144 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 - The first field is the location where the recording file (*.asl) will be saved. Accept
the default location or click Browse to navigate to another location. The default
location is your desktop.
- The second field is the location of the recording profile (*.rpr) that will be used.
Unless Tech Support has sent you a custom recording profile, you will not need to
browse to the location of this file. The general Kingdom.rpr file location is
automatically entered.
3. Click Start Recording to record your session. The Black Box is recording the executable
when you see a blinking bulls-eye icon on your system tray . If you do not see this
icon, then the Black Box is not recording the problem. Contact a support representative
for assistance.
4. Run the application to recreate the scenario.
5. After you have finished performing the function in question, choose Help > Stop
Recording.
6. The <log_file_name>.asl file will be saved to the location specified in the Recording
Details form. The default location is your desktop.
7. Send the log file to Kingdom Tech Support as an E-mail attachment, or through an FTP
site.
If you send the AppSight log file through an FTP sight, send them in binary mode. If the
files are FTP’d via ASCII, the files may become corrupted.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 145

Changing virus scan settings to optimize performance

Changing virus scan settings to optimize performance

To optimize Kingdom performance on your workstation, you may want to exclude certain
folders from being scanned by your anti-virus software. The most common one (by default) is
the recycle bin.
To optimize workstation performance, try excluding the IHS application folder (which defaults
to C:\Program Files\IHS) and Kingdom project folders.
If your anti-virus software scans all files, then it is safe to exempt the following common
Kingdom file types from scanning.

FILES TO EXCLUDE

2d3dpak.exe SegyME.exe

CatalogBuilder.exe ShellLauncher2.exe

echoid.exe Smt.ProjectSettingsConverter.exe

dbadmin.exe Smt.WindowsControls.Samples.Charting
.exe

DBInstallationForm.exe Smt.Security.UI.WPF.exe

DetachTestDatabase.exe SMTSystemInformation.exe

DevKitUtil.exe SmtVisualizationExample.exe

dumpproj.exe sort.exe

FIXNSAMP.exe SqlEOperationsAdmin.exe

FormationTopsUI.exe SQLExpressUtilities.exe

geocalc.dat tks.exe

KDMCatalogBuilder.exe TKSShellApp.exe

KingdomDM.exe TKSDataService.exe

QueryManager.exe TKSDataServer.exe

Isclean.exe UpdateManager.exe

Isinit.exe UpgradeProject.exe

OKD_CopyDB.exe VelPAKlauncher.exe

ProjectSecurity.exe Viz.Viewer.exe

146 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Changing virus scan settings to optimize performance

rdibmsgy.exe vusage.exe

registertks.exe WellExplorer.exe

Scanit.exe WellTest.exe

FILE TYPES TO EXCLUDE

.1 .ct6 .grd li72 .s75 .set .sur

.adg .ct7 .gth .li75 .s76 .sgy .tks

.arb .ct8 .hrz .lib .s80 .segy .temptree

.asc .ctx .hzn .lin .s81 .sl7 .tpk

.atg .cu7 .knx .los .s82 .spd .tr6

.bin .cul .klg .mdb .s83 .slc .txt

.cfg .dat .ksd .mdf .s84 .ssn .w1*

.clb .fio .las .plg .s85 .sscl .w16

.cpt .flt .ldf .plt .s86 .shp .wpo

.crd .gly .ldg .s74 .sdd .shx .wv2

.xml

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 147

Know your workstation specifications

Know your workstation specifications

Kingdom provides a convenient and effective way to view and send system information to
technical support personnel.
Kingdom’s System Information Utility displays the following information about your system:

• Video • Network
• Operating System • Printers
• Processor • Services
• Memory • Environment Variables
• Disk Space

Launch the System Information Utility from Start > Programs > The Kingdom Software
[version#] > System Information Utility.

Click the desired tab in the System Information Utility window to view the system
information, and save or send as a Software System Information log.

148 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Know your workstation specifications

Video
Select the Video tab to display video card driver, memory, and hardware information.Use the
scroll bar to view the entire contents.

Note: Refer to ------Video System Information------ in the Software System Information log
example for an example of the entire contents of the Video tab.

Operating System
Select the Operating System tab to display operating system name, version, service pack,
and the directory location on disk.

Note: Serial number information is not saved to the clipboard or file and is only displayed for
customer convenience.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 149

Know your workstation specifications

Processor
Select the Processor tab to display the name, manufacturer, speed and cache size of your
computer’s CPU. This tab also displays more detailed processor information.Use the scroll
bar to view the entire contents.

Note: Refer to ------Processor Information------ in the Software System Information log

example for an example of the entire contents of the Processor tab.

Memory
Select the Memory tab to display the amount of both virtual and RAM memory available to
the system.

150 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Know your workstation specifications

Disk Space
Select the Disk Space tab to display disk drive total space, free space, the file system, such
as NTFS, and the percentage used for each detected drive.Use the scroll bar to view the
entire contents.

Note: Refer to ------Disk Space Information------ in the Software System Information log
example for an example of the entire contents of the Disk Space tab.

Network
Select the network tab to display the system’s MAC address, speed, manufacturer, and
adapter type.This tab also displays more detailed network information.Use the scroll bar to
view the entire contents.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 151

Know your workstation specifications

Note: Refer to ------Network Information------ in the Software System Information log

example for an example of the entire contents of the Network tab.

Printers
Select the Printers tab to display a list of all installed printer drivers, manufacturers, and the
location of the driver files on disk.Use the scroll bar to view the entire contents.

152 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Know your workstation specifications

Note: Refer to ------Printer System Information------ in the Software System Information log
example for an example of the entire contents of the Printers tab.

Services
Select the Services tab to display all installed services and their current status. The left
column displays the status: running, paused, or stopped. The right column displays a list of
the process names in alphabetical order.Use the scroll bar to view the entire contents.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 153

Know your workstation specifications

Note: Refer to ------Service Status Information------ in the Software System Information log
example for an example of the entire contents of the Services tab.

Environment Variables
Select the Environmental Variables tab to display an alphabetical list of the Windows system
variables.Use the scroll bar to view the entire contents.

154 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Know your workstation specifications

Note: Refer to ------Environment Variables Information------ in the Software System

Information log example for an example of the entire contents of the Environment
Variables tab.

Save or send your System Information log

The information generated and displayed in the 10 tabs is called the Kingdom Software
System Information log. You can copy, save, and/or E-mail the log by clicking one of the
buttons displayed on the bottom of the System Information Utility window. The System
Information Utility Log options are listed below:
• Copy to Clipboard
• Save As
• Email
• Help
• Kingdom Software System Information Log Format

Copy to Clipboard
Click Copy to Clipboard to copy the Kingdom Software System Information log into the
clipboard. After the information has been successfully copied, the following message will
display:
• Click OK, open a file such as Word or Notepad, and paste the contents of the current tab
to the desired file.
• Save As

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 155

Know your workstation specifications

Click the Save As button to open the Save As dialog box. A Notepad file containing all
system information can then be saved to any location. The default name of the file is
SystemInformation.log. The default location is your desktop.

Email
Click the Email button to send an email containing your system information to Kingdom
technical support personnel.
• Type in the email address of one of support personnel at <name>@ihs.com or
• Select from the scroll down list and click the Send Email button.

Note: The Email option only works with Microsoft Outlook. If you do not have Microsoft
Outlook installed, click the Copy to Clipboard, and paste the information into the body
of your email. Then send the email to the email address of one of support personnel
at <name>@ihs.com.

Help
Click the Help button to display System Information Utility Version information, contact
information for Kingdom support and the Help files.
System Information Utility, Version 1.0
Copyright 2006-2007 Seismic Micro-Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
8584 Katy Freeway, Suite 400, Houston, Texas 77024
Phone: 713 464-6188, Fax: 713-464-6440

Note: Click Help for information on Kingdom Software System Information Log Format, or to
view a Software System Information log example.

Kingdom Software System Information Log Format

The details of the System Information Utility Log will change from system to system, but the
log will always have the following general format.
------Operating System Information------
------Disk Space Information------
------Memory Information------
------Processor Information------
------Printer System Information------
------Video System Information------
------Network Information------
------Service Status Information------
------Environment Variables Information------

156 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Know your workstation specifications

Software System Information log example

Below is an example of a System Information Utility Log. The format of the text has been
modified to improve legibility.
---------------------------------------------------------
Seismic Micro-Technology, Inc. System Information Utility
Copyright 2006-2007, All Rights Reserved
Report created: 9/20/2006 9:26:00 AM
---------------------------------------------------------

------Operating System Information------

OS Name = Microsoft Windows XP Professional
OS Version = 5.1.2600
Windows Directory = C:\WINDOWS
Service Pack (Major Version) = 2
Service Pack (Minor Version) = 0

------Disk Space Information------

Free Space on Drive: C: = 15,331,892 bytes.
Total Space on Drive: C: = 36,965,532 bytes.
File System on Drive: C: = NTFS
Percentage used on Drive: C: = 41 percent

Free Space on Drive: X: = 280,346,672 bytes.

Total Space on Drive: X: = 1,509,949,440 bytes.
File System on Drive: X: = NTFS
Percentage used on Drive: X: = 18 percent

------Memory Information------
Total Physical Memory = 785392 megabytes.
Total Virtual Memory = 2704576 megabytes.
Total Page File Space = 1919184 megabytes.
Available Virtual Memory = 1786972 megabytes.

------Processor Information------
AddressWidth = 32
Architecture = 0
Availability = 3
Caption = x85 Family 15 Model 2 Stepping 7
Config Manager Error Code = x85 Family 15 Model 2 Stepping 7
Config Manager User Config =

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 157

Know your workstation specifications

Cpu Status = 1
Creation Class Name = Win32_Processor
Current Clock Speed = 2392
Current Voltage = 18
Data Width = 32
Description = x85 Family 15 Model 2 Stepping 7
Device ID = CPU0
Error Cleared =
ExtClock = 133
Family = 2
Install Date =
L2 CacheS ize = 0
L2 CacheSpeed =
Level = 15
Load Percentage = 0
Manufacturer = GenuineIntel
Max ClockS peed = 2392
Name = Intel(R) Pentium(R) 4 CPU 2.40GHz
Other Family Description =
PNP Device ID =
Processor Id = BFEBFBFF00000F27
Processor Type= 3
Revision = 519
Role = CPU
Socket Designation = WMT478/NWD
Status = OK
Status Info = 3
Stepping = 7
System Creation Class Name = Win32_ComputerSystem
System Name= TESTX32-3
Unique Id =
Upgrade Method e = 15
Version = Model 2, Stepping 7
Voltage aps =

158 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Know your workstation specifications

------Printer System Information------

Name = Microsoft Office Document Image Writer Driver,3,Windows NT x85
Configuration File = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3mdiui.dll
Data File = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\mdiui.dll
Driver Path = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\mdigraph.dll

Supported Platform = Windows NT x85

Version = 3

Name = HP LaserJet 4V,3,Windows NT x85

OEMUrl = http://www.hp.com/embed/
Win2kSupportLinks?id=%HARDWAREID%&model=%MODEL%
Configuration File = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\UNIDRVUI.DLL
Data File = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\HPLJ4V.GPD
Driver Path = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\UNIDRV.DLL
Help File = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\UNIDRV.HLP
Monitor
Name = PJL Language Monitor
Supported Platform = Windows NT x85
Version = 3

Name = HP LaserJet 1200 Series PCL 6,3,Windows NT x85

OEMUrl = http://www.hp.com/embed/
Win2kSupportLinks?id=%HARDWAREID%&model=%MODEL%
Configuration File = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\hpbf312E.dll
Data File = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\hpbf312I.pmd
Driver Path = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\hpbf312G.dll
Help File = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\hpbf312I.hlp
Monitor
Name = PJL Language Monitor
Supported Platform = Windows NT x85
Version = 3

Name = HP DesignJet 755CM/PS,3,Windows NT x85

OEMUrl = http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=37&prd=10798&sbp=Printers

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 159

Know your workstation specifications

Configuration File = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\PS5UI.DLL

Data File = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\HP755__1.PPD
Driver Path = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\PSCRIPT5.DLL
Help File = C:\WINDOWS\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X85\3\PSCRIPT.HLP
Monitor
Name = PJL Language Monitor
Supported Platform = Windows NT x85
Version = 3

------Video System Information------

Adapter Compatibility = NVIDIA
Adapter DAC Type = Integrated RAMDAC
AdapterRAM = 67108864
Color Table Entries =
ConfigManager Error Code = 0
ConfigManager User Config = False
Creation Class Name = Win32_VideoController
Current Bits Per Pixel = 32
Current Horizontal Resolution = 1152
Current Number Of Colors = 4294967296
Current Number Of Columns = 0
Current Number Of Rows = 0
Current Refresh Rate = 75
Current Scan Mode = 4
Current Vertical Resolution = 864
Description = NVIDIA Quadro NVS with AGP8X
DeviceID = VideoController1
Device SpecificPens = 4294967295
Dither Type =
Driver Date = 20050224123200.000000-000
Driver Version = 6.14.10.7184
Error Cleared =
Error Description =
ICM Intent =
ICM Method =

160 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Know your workstation specifications

Inf Filename = oem7.inf

Inf Section = nv4_WSApps_DualView
Install Date =
Installed Display Drivers = nv4_disp.dll
Last Error Code =
Max Memory Supported =
Max Number Controlled =
Max Refresh Rate = 85
Min Refresh Rate = 60
Monochrome = False
Name = NVIDIA Quadro NVS with AGP8X
Number Of Color Planes = 1
Number Of Video Pages =
PNP Device ID =
PCI\VEN_10DE&DEV_018A&SUBSYS_016810DE&REV_A2\4&6F1E3D&0&0008
Power Management Supported =
Protocol Supported =
Reserved System Palette Entries =
Specification Version =
Status = OK
Status Info = OK
System Creation Class Name = Win32_ComputerSystem
System Name = TESTX32-3
System Palette Entries =
Time Of Last Reset =
Video Architecture = 5
Video Memory Type = 2
Video Mode =
Video Mode Description = 1152 x 864 x 4294967296 colors
Video Processor = Quadro NVS with AGP8X

------Network Information------
AdapterType = Ethernet 802.3
Adapter Type ID = 0
Availability = 3

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 161

Know your workstation specifications

Caption = 00000001] Intel(R) PRO/100 VE Network Connection

Description = Intel(R) PRO/100 VE Network Connection
Device ID = 1

MAC Address = 00:09:6B:E1:49:D6

Manufacturer = Intel
Name = Intel(R) PRO/100 VE Network Connection
Net Connection ID = Local Area Connection
Net Connection Status = 2
PNP DeviceID =
PCI\VEN_8086&DEV_1039&SUBSYS_02671014&REV_82\4&25296D99&0&40F0
Product Name = Intel(R) PRO/100 VE Network Connection
AdapterType = Ethernet 802.3
Adapter Type ID = 0
Availability = 3
Caption = 00000002] RAS Async Adapter
Description = RAS Async Adapter
Device ID = 2

MAC Address = 00:09:6B:E1:49:D6

Manufacturer = Intel
Name = RAS Async Adapter
Net Connection ID = Local Area Connection
Net Connection Status = 2
PNP DeviceID =
PCI\VEN_8086&DEV_1039&SUBSYS_02671014&REV_82\4&25296D99&0&40F0
Product Name = RAS Async Adapter
AdapterType = Ethernet 802.3
Adapter Type ID = 0
Availability = 3
Caption = 00000003] Packet Scheduler Miniport
Description = Packet Scheduler Miniport
Device ID = 3

MAC Address = 00:09:6B:E1:49:D6

162 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Know your workstation specifications

Manufacturer = Microsoft
Name = Packet Scheduler Miniport
Net Connection ID = Local Area Connection
Net Connection Status = 2
PNP DeviceID = ROOT\MS_PSCHEDMP\0000
Product Name = Packet Scheduler Miniport
AdapterType = Ethernet 802.3
Adapter Type ID = 0
Availability = 3
Caption = 00000004] WAN Miniport (L2TP)
Description = WAN Miniport (L2TP)
Device ID = 4

MAC Address = 00:09:6B:E1:49:D6

Manufacturer = Microsoft
Name = WAN Miniport (L2TP)
Net Connection ID = Local Area Connection
Net Connection Status = 2
PNP DeviceID = ROOT\MS_L2TPMINIPORT\0000
Product Name = WAN Miniport (L2TP)
AdapterType = Wide Area Network (WAN)
Adapter Type ID = 3
Availability = 3
Caption = 00000005] WAN Miniport (PPTP)
Description = WAN Miniport (PPTP)
Device ID = 5

MAC Address = 50:50:54:50:30:30

Manufacturer = Microsoft
Name = WAN Miniport (PPTP)
Net Connection ID = Local Area Connection
Net Connection Status = 2
PNP DeviceID = ROOT\MS_PPTPMINIPORT\0000
Product Name = WAN Miniport (PPTP)

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 163

Know your workstation specifications

AdapterType = Wide Area Network (WAN)

Adapter Type ID = 3
Availability = 3
Caption = 00000006] WAN Miniport (PPPOE)
Description = WAN Miniport (PPPOE)
Device ID = 6

MAC Address = 33:50:6F:45:30:30

Manufacturer = Microsoft
Name = WAN Miniport (PPPOE)
Net Connection ID = Local Area Connection
Net Connection Status = 2
PNP DeviceID = ROOT\MS_PPPOEMINIPORT\0000
Product Name = WAN Miniport (PPPOE)
AdapterType = Wide Area Network (WAN)
Adapter Type ID = 3
Availability = 3
Caption = 00000007] Direct Parallel
Description = Direct Parallel
Device ID = 7

MAC Address = 33:50:6F:45:30:30

Manufacturer = Microsoft
Name = Direct Parallel
Net Connection ID = Local Area Connection
Net Connection Status = 2
PNP DeviceID = ROOT\MS_PTIMINIPORT\0000
Product Name = Direct Parallel
AdapterType = Wide Area Network (WAN)
Adapter Type ID = 3
Availability = 3
Caption = 00000008] WAN Miniport (IP)
Description = WAN Miniport (IP)
Device ID = 8

164 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Know your workstation specifications

MAC Address = 33:50:6F:45:30:30

Manufacturer = Microsoft
Name = WAN Miniport (IP)
Net Connection ID = Local Area Connection
Net Connection Status = 2
PNP DeviceID = ROOT\MS_NDISWANIP\0000
Product Name = WAN Miniport (IP)
AdapterType = Ethernet 802.3
Adapter Type ID = 0
Availability = 3
Caption = 00000009] Packet Scheduler Miniport
Description = Packet Scheduler Miniport
Device ID = 9

MAC Address = 46:3E:20:52:41:53

Manufacturer = Microsoft
Name = Packet Scheduler Miniport
Net Connection ID = Local Area Connection
Net Connection Status = 2
PNP DeviceID = ROOT\MS_PSCHEDMP\0001
Product Name = Packet Scheduler Miniport

------Service Status Information------

Stopped: Alerter
Running: ALG
Running: Apache2
Stopped: AppMgmt
Stopped: aspnet_state
Running: AudioSrv
Running: AutoMate6
Stopped: BITS
Stopped: Browser
Running: CiSvc
Stopped: ClipSrv

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 165

Know your workstation specifications

Stopped: clr_optimization_v2.0.50727_32
Running: COMSysApp
Running: Crypkey License
Running: CryptSvc
Running: DcomLaunch
Running: Dhcp
Stopped: dmadmin
Stopped: dmserver
Running: Dnscache
Running: ERSvc
Running: Eventlog
Running: EventSystem
Running: FastUserSwitchingCompatibility
Running: FileZilla Server
Running: helpsvc
Stopped: HidServ
Stopped: HTTPFilter
Stopped: IDriverT
Stopped: ImapiService
Running: iPodService
Running: lanmanserver
Running: lanmanworkstation
Running: LmHosts
Running: MDM
Stopped: Messenger
Stopped: mnmsrvc
Running: MSDTC
Running: MSIServer
Stopped: mysql
Stopped: NetDDE
Stopped: NetDDEdsdm
Stopped: Netlogon
Running: Netman
Running: Nla

166 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Know your workstation specifications

Stopped: NtLmSsp
Stopped: NtmsSvc
Running: PlugPlay
Running: PolicyAgent
Running: ProtectedStorage
Stopped: RasAuto
Running: RasMan
Stopped: RDSessMgr
Stopped: RemoteAccess
Stopped: RpcLocator
Running: RpcSs
Stopped: RSVP
Running: SamSs
Stopped: SCardSvr
Running: Schedule
Running: seclogon
Running: SENS
Running: SharedAccess
Running: ShellHWDetection
Running: Spooler
Running: srservice
Running: SSDPSRV
Running: stisvc
Stopped: SwPrv
Stopped: SysmonLog
Running: TapiSrv
Running: TermService
Running: Themes
Running: TrkWks
Running: UMWdf
Stopped: upnphost
Stopped: UPS
Stopped: Visual Studio Analyzer RPC bridge
Stopped: VSS

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 167

Know your workstation specifications

Running: W32Time
Running: ebClient
Running: winmgmt
Stopped: WmdmPmSN
Stopped: WmiApSrv
Running: wscsvc
Running: wuauserv
Running: WZCSVC
Stopped: xmlprov
Stopped: SQLWriter
Running: SQLBrowser
Stopped: MSSQLServerADHelper
Running: MSSQL$SQLEXPRESS

------Environment Variables Information------

ALLUSERSPROFILE=C:\Documents and Settings\All Users.WINDOWS

APPDATA=C:\Documents and Settings\Owner\Application Data

CLASSPATH=C:\Program Files\Java\jre1.5.0_05\lib\ext\QTJava.zip

CLIENTNAME=Console

CommonProgramFiles=C:\Program Files\Common Files

COMPUTERNAME= _PORTABLE

ComSpec=C:\WINDOWS\system32\cmd.exe

HOMEPATH=\Documents and Settings\Owner

include=C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2003\SDK\v1.1\include\;C:\Program

Files\Microsoft Visual Studio\VC98\atl\include;C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual
Studio\VC98\mfc\include;C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio\VC98\include

168 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Know your workstation specifications

lib=C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2003\SDK\v1.1\Lib\;C:\Program

Files\Microsoft Visual Studio\VC98\mfc\lib;C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio\VC98\lib

LOGONSERVER=\\SEISMICMICRO

MSDevDir=C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio\Common\MSDev98

NUMBER_OF_PROCESSORS=1

OS=Windows_NT

Path= C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual

Studio\common\msdev98\bin;C:\systemutilities\;C:\WINDOWS\system32;C:\WINDOWS;C:\
WINDOWS\System32\Wbem;C:\Program Files\QuickTime\QTSystem\;c:\Program
Files\Microsoft SQL Server\90\Tools\binn;C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual
Studio\Common\Tools\WinNT;C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual
Studio\Common\MSDev98\Bin;C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual
Studio\Common\Tools;C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio\VC98\bin
PATHEXT=.COM;.EXE;.BAT;.CMD;.VBS;.VBE;.JS;.JSE;.WSF;.WSH
PROCESSOR_ARCHITECTURE=x85
PROCESSOR_IDENTIFIER=x85 Family 15 Model 2 Stepping 9, GenuineIntel
PROCESSOR_LEVEL=15
PROCESSOR_REVISION=0209
ProgramFiles=C:\Program Files
QTJAVA=C:\Program Files\Java\jre1.5.0_05\lib\ext\QTJava.zip
SESSIONNAME=Console
SystemDrive=C:
SystemRoot=C:\WINDOWS
TEMP=C:\DOCUME~1\Owner\LOCALS~1\Temp
TMP=C:\DOCUME~1\Owner\LOCALS~1\Temp
USERDOMAIN= _PORTABLE
USERNAME=Owner
USERPROFILE=C:\Documents and Settings\Owner
VS71COMNTOOLS=C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2003\Common7\Tools\
WecVersionForRosebud.F18=2
windir=C:\WINDOWS

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 169

Know your workstation specifications

HOMEDRIVE=C:

170 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Clean clock tampering

Clean clock tampering

If you get a Clock Tampering message, you will need to contact Tech Support to resolve the
issue. Tech support will send you the required keys.txt file.
1. Please make sure that you leave the Window Time Service turned off. This service can
cause clock tampering errors when it tries to re-synch your laptop’s clock.
a. Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services > Windows Time > Right
Mouse Button > Properties > set Startup type to Disabled.
b. Stop the Windows Time service.
2. Make sure that User Account Control is turned off before you run the clock tampering
batch files (GetLockCode.bat, CleanClockTampering.bat, CleanClockTampering_72.bat)
a. Start > Control Panel > User Accounts > Change User Account Control settings
> move the slider to Never notify.
b. You will have to reboot your system for this change to take effect.
3. Request a keys.txt file from tech support and clean clock tampering. Remember that
keys.txt files have a limited shelf life; 24 hours or 3 tries, whichever comes first.
a. You must be logged on as an Administrator.
b. Go to the Kingdom installation folder (for example, C:\Program Files
<(x86)>\KingdomSuite\TKS<Version>).
c. In Windows Explorer, look for a file called: GetLockCode.bat
d. Right mouse button on GetLockCode.bat, and select Run as administrator
e. A DOS windows will appear. Take a screen shot and email it to Tech Support.
f. Tech Support will generate a fresh “keys.txt” file and email it back to you.
g. Copy the keys.txt file to the Kingdom installation folder.
h. In Windows Explorer, look for a file called: CleanClockTampering.bat.
i. Right mouse button on CleanClockTampering.bat, and select Run as
Administrator. Notepad will appear with a message. Close Notepad.
j. In Windows Explorer, look for a file called CleanClockTampering_72.bat
k. Right mouse button on CleanClockTampering_72.bat, and select Run as
Administrator. Notepad will appear with a message. Close Notepad.
l. You should now be able to run Kingdom.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 171

Clean clock tampering

172 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Kingdom Project Backups
This section includes the following topics:
• What do I backup?—the Kingdom project includes 4 components. For a full backup, you
must include all components.
• Backing up Kingdom Project Databases—a brief overview of backup procedures for SQL
Server, Oracle, and SQL Server Express databases.
• Make a Single Project Manual Backup with DBAdmin—steps for backing up a Kingdom
project with a SQL Server or Oracle database using Kingdom’s Database Admin tool.

Note: For Manual SQL Server Express project backups see

Manual SQL Server Express (SSE) Management.

• Restore a Kingdom project with DBAdmin—steps for restoring a Kingdom project backup
using Kingdom’s Database Admin tool.
• Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups—steps for automating
multiple project backups.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 173

What do I backup?

What do I backup?
Every Kingdom project has four parts:
• The project files —by default, project files are saved in the project folder. For a
description of file types see The Kingdom Project Architecture.
• The project database—Access databases and Auto SQL Server Express databases
reside inside the project folder. Oracle and SQL Server databases (including Manual SQL
Server Express databases) are external to the project folder. See Backing up Kingdom
Project Databases.
• External data files —some files can be stored outside of the project folder. If files such
as seismic data, author folders, or raster logs have been saved in locations outside of the
project folder, these files will not be backed up unless they are copied or moved into the
project folder. However, also note that external files that do not change often such as
seismic files can be backed up separately. See The Kingdom Project Architecture.
• Custom color bar files stored in the <Kingdom installation directory>\Colorbars folder.
Custom color bars can be saved individually or placed in the same zip file.

Note: Do not save the colorbars that ship with the product. Save only colorbars you
have created or modified. Although user-customized color bars can be saved
anywhere, by default they are stored in Kingdom installation Colorbars directory.

174 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Backing up Kingdom Project Databases

Backing up Kingdom Project Databases

Microsoft Access Projects
For MS Access-based projects, most well data and pointer files reside in the <project
name>70.mdb in the project directory. The <project name>70.mdb database file can be
backed up in the same file as the rest of the project.

Oracle or SQL Server projects

Additional backup procedures are recommended if Oracle or SQL Server is the selected
database. In the event that all projects are stored in one Oracle database, all projects would
be rolled back if it became necessary to roll back the database. However, this creates the
possibility that the Oracle backups and the project folder backups could get out of sync if they
are not coordinated. If this were to happen, the result would be either orphaned database
records, or orphaned project files.
To keep the project file data and database data synchronized, you can use the Database
Admin tool to backup individual Oracle or SQL Server Kingdom projects.
• First Make a Single Project Manual Backup with DBAdmin
• Then Restore a Kingdom project with DBAdmin
It is, however, a recommended practice to create a unique Oracle account or SQL Server
database to accommodate each Kingdom project. In that way, most standard external
database backup-restore procedures will treat each Kingdom project independently, and not
rollback multiple projects to restore a single project.

Auto SQL Server Express Kingdom Projects

The database for Auto SQL Server Express projects are in the project folder. Both the
database tables and project files can be backed up by making a copy of the project folder.

Manual SQL Server Express Kingdom Projects

For Manual SQL Server Express projects use the SQL Server Express Management tool in
the Database Admin utility. This tool will backup both database tables and project files into
one file.
You can access the tool from the Kingdom Start Page.
Under Tools, click Manage your Manual SSE Projects.

Related Topic
Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 175

Make a Single Project Manual Backup with DBAdmin

Make a Single Project Manual Backup with DBAdmin

Start > Programs >The Kingdom Software > Dbadmin
1. To open DbAdmin from your desktop, select Start > Programs > The Kingdom
Software > DbAdmin [version].

Note: The version of DbAdmin, both the bit version and release version, must match the
version of Kingdom the project was last opened in.

2. In the Database Admin Tool window, select Database > Connect.

3. In the Select a Project Manager dialog box, select the database type of the current
project and click OK.

Note: For Access projects, the database <project name>70.mdb file is located in the
project folder and has a size limit of 2 GB. To back up an Access project, you do
not need to use DBAdmin. Simply copy the project folder to the backup location.
Be sure to include any files that may reside outside of the project folder.

However, if space in the backup location is limited, you can create a backup using
the DBAdmin tool as enumerated below. The Access project backup without the
original database will be smaller than the original project.

4. For Oracle and SQL Server databases, enter the login credentials and click Next.
For SQL Server Express or Access projects, navigate to the <project name>.tks file of
the project you wish to back up and select.
5. When you are connected to the project database in DBAdmin, click the project that is to
be backed up.
Figure 1 Select Project to be Cloned in DbAdmin

176 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Make a Single Project Manual Backup with DBAdmin

6. With the project highlighted, select Project > Export to File.

7. In the Save In text box navigate to the project folder. (This is the default location.)
8. In the Save As dialog box, edit the name for the file. The default name is export.dmp. The
default save location is the Kingdom project directory.

Note: Database Admin Tool dump files are not equivalent to Oracle database dump files.
They are ASCII xml files unique to Kingdom.

9. Click No in the NULL out message to complete the export.

10. When the export process is complete, exit the Database Admin tool.
The project folder now contains a dump of the project database and can be saved in the
designated backup location.

Warning: Certain files may reside outside the project folder: seismic files, raster logs, author
folders, and culture files. For a complete backup, ensure that these external files
are in the project folder, or that their respective folders are also backed up.

Note: If your original project was Access, the backup folder will contain both the dump of the
database (export.dmp), and the original Access database (<project name>70.mdb). If

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 177

Make a Single Project Manual Backup with DBAdmin

the size of the backup folder is an issue, you can remove the original access
database to an external location as the contents are contained in the export.dmp file.

178 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Restore a Kingdom project with DBAdmin

Restore a Kingdom project with DBAdmin

Project > Create New Project
If you have created a project backup of your Kingdom project with the Database Admin tool,
you can restore the project with the same tool.
You will:
1. Create a New Twin Project in the Target Database
2. Import the database dump into the twin project’s database.

Note: To restore SQL Server Express projects, use the SQL Server Express
Management tool. On the Kingdom Start Page click Manage your Manual SSE
Projects.

Create a New Twin Project in the Target Database

The purpose of this step is to create the database tables in the Access, SQL Server or Oracle
database.
1. In Kingdom, select Project > Create New Project.
2. Navigate to the Kingdom project backup folder. Create the new project inside the existing
project folder.
3. In the Create New Project dialog box, type the name of the project to be restored. This
name must be identical to the original name. After typing in the project name click Create.
4. Click Yes in the warning message.
5. In the Author Name dialog box, enter an author and click OK.
6. In the Select Project Database, select Access, Oracle or SQL Server and click OK.
7. For SQL Server and Oracle, input the instance and login credentials and click OK.
8. A message may be displayed about creating the new tables: click OK. The twin project is
created, as are the project tables in the designated database.
- For Access projects, the <project name>70.mdb file is created in the twin project
folder.
- For Oracle and SQL Server projects, the project tables are created in the designated
Oracle or SQL Server instance, and the <project name>.xml file is created in the twin
project folder.

Note: The <project name>.xml file is the pointer file to the SQL Server or Oracle
database. This file contains the instance, username, password, and windows
login information. Access projects do not have an .xml file.

After the project tables are created, the Project Options dialog box opens.
9. Enter the same project options as the original project and click OK.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 179

Restore a Kingdom project with DBAdmin

10. Click No to Do you want to use the coordinate system of an existing project? This
information is already recorded in the dumped database in the backup, and will be
retrieved once the project is converted.
11. Exit the Kingdom application.
12. Navigate to the twin project folder which is located within the original project folder.
- For Access projects, copy the <project name>70.mdb file up one level into the
original project directory.
- For SQL Server and Oracle projects, copy the <project name>.xml file up one level
into the original project directory.
The project database is now ready to be populated by the export.dmp file. For SQL Server
and Oracle projects, the <project name>.xml file is now in the project folder to point to the
database.

Import the database dump into the twin project’s database

Start > Programs > The Kingdom Software [version] > DBAdmin
1. Run the DBAdmin tool again. From your desktop, select Start > Programs > The
Kingdom Software [version] > DBAdmin.
2. Select Database > Connect.
3. Select the Project Manager for the project (database type).
4. For SQL Server or Oracle, input the Service Name, User Name, and Password then click
OK.
For SQL Server Express and Access projects, browse to the tks file in the project folder
and click OK.
For Oracle or SQL Server, you may see more than one project in the left panel. Select the
new project that you just created from the project tree.
For Access and SQL Server Express projects there will be only one project in the left
panel.

180 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Restore a Kingdom project with DBAdmin

Figure 2 Select New Project in Database through DbAdmin

Note: With some Oracle and SQL Server database configurations there may be multiple
Kingdom projects in the same database, with each project identified by a unique
prepend number. An easy to find a project in DBADMIN is to search by the project’s
GUID number. The GUID can be found in the <project name>.xml file in the project
directory, and entered (including the enclosing brackets) in the window after clicking
Project > Find Project by GUID in DBADMIN.

5. Select Project > Import From File and click Yes to import the export.dmp file from the
project backup folder.
6. Click Yes in the replace project warning.
7. Navigate to the export.dmp file in the project backup folder, and click Open to begin the
import.
An import status dialog will be displayed.
The time needed to import will depend on the project size. The dbAdmin.exe main
window may not be displayed throughout the entire import process but will be displayed
again when the import is completed.
8. When the import is complete, exit the DBAdmin tool.
The project should be restored to an active state.

Check the status of the restored project

1. Open Kingdom and open the restored project.
2. Enter the database Service Name, User Name, and Password and click OK.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 181

Restore a Kingdom project with DBAdmin

3. Select an Author and click OK. You are now running the restored project.
4. You can now delete the twin project folder in the project directory.

182 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups

Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express

backups
The following are instructions on how to schedule automatic backups of your SQL Server and
SQL Server Express databases using a script constructed with the SQL Server user
interface. This procedure can be configured in and launched automatically by the SQL Server
Agent tool. The Agent tool is not available in SQL Express, although the scripts are just as
effective—they simply must be launched manually at the time of backup.
The steps include:
• Creating the backup script
• Scheduling the backup with SQL Server Agent

Creating the backup script

1. Launch the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio (or Management Studio Express)
tool.

Note: The SQL Server Management Studio Express tool can be downloaded from the
Microsoft download Center. Click the link below and scroll to the bottom of the
page:

Download Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express

2. Connect to the SQL Server or SQL Server Express database instance.

3. Expand the Databases node and right click the database to be backed up.
4. Select Tasks > Back Up (see figure below).
Figure 3 Starting the Backup

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 183

Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups

5. In the Backup Up Database dialog box, specify the following:

• Backup set name (or accept the default)
• Backup set will expire—specify the number of days that must elapse before this
backup set expires and can be overwritten. The default is 0 which means that the
backup set will never expire.
• Destination—backup location (see figure below). Accept the default or browse to the
selected location— a local drive on the SQL database serve.
Figure 4 Selecting backup parameters

184 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups

Note: The backup file location must be a local drive on the database server. If necessary,
the files can be moved later. SQL Server and SQL Express both require you to use
only local drives as the location to: 1) install the software, 2) store database files and
3) save database backup files. SAN drives also qualify as local drives.

Note: If you accepted the default location, do not click OK yet.

6. In the Back Up Database dialog box you can click OK to carry out an immediate backup
of the Kingdom project database, or you can save the backup instructions to a file for later
execution.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 185

Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups

To save the backup instructions to a file, click the down-arrow next to the Script button
and select Script Action to File (figure below).
Figure 5 Saving Backup Instructions

7. Select a location to save the structured query language (.sql) file and enter a File name:
Kingdom_Projects_Auto_Backups. (No default file name is provided).
8. Open the resulting file for edit. Right click the file and select Edit. The file will open in
Notepad.

Note: Double-clicking the file will launch an actual backup job.

9. To add additional databases to this script file in order to back up all databases, you can do
one of two things:
a. Repeat the above steps and select Script Action to Clipboard instead of Script
Action to File. Then paste (Ctrl+V) the backup instruction string into the .sql text file
that is open (figure below), or
b. Repeatedly copy and paste the initial line of instructions and edit the database name
on each line to match the remaining database names. There are three occurrences to
edit on each line of instructions.
Figure 6 Results of Pasting New Backup Instruction into .sql File

186 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups

10. Save the final edited .sql backup script when completed.
11. When it is time to make a backup of your project databases, simply double-click the *.sql
backup script file, and the SQL Server Studio Management (or Management Express)
tool will open with the backup scripted steps ready to execute.
12. Click Execute in the Management Studio (figure below). The backups will be written to
the designated location: <database name>.bak.
Figure 7 Executing the Backup Script Manually

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 187

Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups

13. Copy the backup files out of the destination folder to a permanent location so they are not
overwritten later.

Scheduling the backup with SQL Server Agent

If you are using the full-featured SQL Server instead of SQL Server Express you will see SQL
Server Agent as one object in the operations tree on the Studio Management interface.
1. Expand the SQL Server Agent tool, right-click Jobs and select New Job (figure below).
Figure 8 Creating a Backup Job

188 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups

2. On the New Job dialog box, assign a job name and category (figure below).
Figure 9 Describing the Backup Job

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 189

Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups

3. Next, Select Steps under Select a page, and add the steps you previously scripted.
a. Click New at the bottom of the New Job dialog box.
b. Insert the steps contained in the .sql backup script you previously built. Click Open in
the New Job Step window (see figure below).
Figure 10 Preparing to Open the .sql Script to Insert Job Steps

190 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups

c. Navigate to the location of the .sql script you built and click Open (see figure below).
Figure 11 Navigating to the .sql Script

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 191

Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups

The backup script steps contained in the .sql file will now appear as steps in your
scheduled backup job.
d. Enter a Step name and click OK (see figure below).
Figure 12 Backup Steps Now as Part of the Job

192 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups

4. Now, under Select a page click Schedules on the Job Properties window and click the
New button to open the New Job Schedule window.
5. Select a backup time or frequency and start date and end date for your job, then click OK
to approve the scheduled job (see figure below).
Figure 13 Creating a Daily Backup Schedule

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 193

Automating SQL Server and SQL Server Express backups

6. Add any other desire alerts or notifications and click OK to complete the scheduling.
7. Check the destination folder location of the backups after a scheduled job to assure that
backups are being properly executed.
8. Copy backups to a new location to prevent over-writing of backups if a longer history is
required. You can script this copy job to a .bat batch file and place it in the Windows
scheduler to make your job easier.

Summary
Kingdom database backups can be automated with the help of either SQL Server
Management Studio Express (downloaded from the Microsoft Download Center) or with SQL
Server Management Studio, purchased as part of full-featured SQL Server:
• The sql script that is created with SQL Server Management Studio Express must be
executed manually.
• The same sql script is used by SQL Server’s Agent to schedule the backups for
automated after-hours execution.

194 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

PAKnotes
PAKnotes allow you to manage knowledge in your project. Currently, PAKnotes are available
in the Geophysics and Geology main modules of the Kingdom software.
PAKnotes can be used as interpretation aides and reminders in a base map, a Vertical
Seismic Display (VSD), or the Project Explorer window. New PAKnotes can be created within
the project, linked to an external file, or connected to a web page.
PAKnotes can be displayed in an iconized state or in an expanded state. Iconized PAKnotes
are represented by an image and are not readable. Expanded PAKnotes are displayed as a
small page with text and can be read.

Two parts of PAKnotes

Two items define PAKnotes:
• the Application
• the Object

Application
The application is the software used to create the PAKnote. The applications that launch
when creating PAKnotes are dependent upon the file extensions of the applications listed in
the PAKNotes Templates folder in the directory where you installed Kingdom.
The table below lists the applications and extensions that can be used to create a PAKnote.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 195

 Application File Type Extension

Adobe Acrobat File Reader *.pdf

Encapsulated postscript *.eps

MS Excel Worksheet *.xls

MS Media Player Movie *.avi

Wave Sound *.wav

MS Notepad Plain Text *.txt

MS Paint Picture *.bmp, *.tif, *.jpg

MS PowerPoint Presentation *.ppt

MS Word Text document *.doc

IndexCard Word6.9-95 *.doc

MS WordPad Rich Text *.rtf

n/a web pages *.htm, *.html

Object
The object is the project item that the PAKnote pertains to. PAKnotes can be associated with
specific objects in the project that are present and displayed in the current base map or VSD.
These objects include:
• Horizons (base maps and VSDs)
• Faults (base maps and VSDs)
• Grids (base maps and VSDs)
• Surveys, including slices, cross-sections, in-lines, crosslines, and arbitrary lines (base
maps and VSDs)
• Boreholes (base maps and VSDs)
• Formation Tops (VSDs); the PAKnote’s Z value will be measured depth (MD)
• Fault Cuts (VSDs)
• Points (X, Y, Z, or T location, base maps, and VSDs)
If an object is exported, the PAKnote is not exported with it.
A flag will be automatically saved for each PAKnote indicating whether the object is in time or
depth. If a PAKnote’s domain is converted from time to depth or vice versa, the flag will
change accordingly.

196 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

If the object to which a PAKnote is attached is deleted, then the Warning appears. The
PAKnote may either be deleted as well, or converted to a Project Explorer PAKnote.

PAKnotes authorship
The following concepts describe PAKnotes authorship:
• PAKnotes are author-specific project items.
• Any author can view any other displayed author’s public PAKnotes, and can make
changes to them, but may not delete, re-associate them, or move their anchor points.
• Private PAKnotes are only viewable by the author who created them.
• Every PAKnote has a unique name per author.
• PAKnotes are saved in PAKnotes subfolders. When the project author (author who
created the project) is active, PAKnotes are saved in the main PAKnotes subfolder within
the project directory.
• Each additional author has a separate PAKnotes subfolder within their author folder in
the project directory, where their PAKnotes reside.

PAKnote definitions
The following definitions are used in reference to PAKnotes.
• Anchor point is the object or point that is associated with the PAKnote. These are the
coordinates to which the PAKnote is attached. Placement is as follows:
- within one line and trace number for horizon and survey PAKnotes
- within one half of the bin spacing for grid, point, and fault PAKnotes
- the measured depth for borehole, fault cut, and formation top PAKnotes
Formation top and fault cut PAKnotes should match the PAKnote Location and
Association coordinate exactly; the borehole PAKnotes should match measured depths
approximately (to within 200 ft). Time coordinates should be within 10 milliseconds.
The PAKnote may be positioned at the anchor point, or away from the anchor point and
connected by using a line.
• Application state is a PAKnote that is opened outside of Kingdom in a separate
application window. The PAKnote can be saved by using the normal Microsoft save
procedures; however, copies will be written to the requisite subfolders for internal
PAKnotes. All PAKnotes have an application state.
• Association is when a PAKnote is attached to an object.
• Context is synonymous with view. When a PAKnote is double-clicked from Project
Explorer, it is displayed with its context, which means it is displayed within the window in
which it was created, either the base map or VSD. The saved PAKnote context
information includes the window, map or line identification, scale, and the object
association. Context PAKnotes may be displayed in either the iconized or expanded
state.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 197

• Context-less is a PAKnote without a view. A context-less PAKnote is associated with
Project Explorer and may only be displayed in its application window. Context-less
PAKnotes may not be displayed in either the iconized or expanded state.
• Disassociation is when an associated PAKnote is converted to Project Explorer
PAKnote. Any object or point PAKnote may be disassociated through Project >
PAKnotes Management > PAKnotes Management dialog box—Properties tab.
• Expanded state means a displayed PAKnote is in a readable state on the base map and
VSD. Classic style expanded PAKnotes contain a PAKnote title, as well as object
information in parentheses. The PAKnote title is separate from the PAKnote content.
Iconized PAKnotes can be converted to the expanded state using the right mouse button
menu. Expanded PAKnotes can be displayed in one of the three expansion styles:
classic, simple, and clear. Expanded PAKnotes are not editable. All PAKnotes, with the
exception of Project Explorer PAKnotes, have an expanded state.
• External means the PAKnote is created and saved outside the project directory.
• Iconized state means a displayed PAKnote is represented by an icon on the base map
and VSD. This is not a readable state. The icon may be positioned at the anchor point, or
away from the anchor point and connected via a line. Expanded PAKnotes can be
converted to the iconized state using the right mouse button menu. All PAKnotes, with the
exception of Project Explorer PAKnotes, have an iconized state.
• Internal means the PAKnote is created and saved in the author’s PAKnotes subfolder
within the Kingdom project directory.
• Object PAKnote is a PAKnote that has an object association. It has a context, position,
and icon.
• Point PAKnote is one that has a context and a position, but is not associated with an
object. These are PAKnotes for which a location is desired, but there is no object
connection.
• Position vector is the angle of the line that connects the PAKnote border to the
association object. The center of the PAKnote is used to calculate the vector. The position
vector is specific to that PAKnote.
• Project Explorer PAKnote (PT PAKnote) is a PAKnote that is only associated to Project
Explorer. It has no context, position, or icon, other than that appearing on Project
Explorer. It is only available within the application state.

Types of PAKnotes
There are several types of PAKnotes:
• New PAKnote is a PAKnote created directly on the base map or VSD using the available
applications. It is saved in a PAKnotes folder either within the active author’s folder or
project directory. Each new PAKnote has a unique ID. The naming protocol is
PAKnote00000xxxxx.ext, where the x’s represent the PAKnote ID. The file extension
.ext is identical to the application type extension. When expanded, new PAKnotes are
printable along with the context window. The current displayed page is the one printed. It
is also be printable as a standalone file from its application window, in which it can be
edited. These are internal PAKnotes.

198 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

• File PAKnote; Linked is a PAKnote that is linked to the location of the original source file;
however, no copy of the source file is saved by Kingdom. The PAKnote is separate from
the project, and stored at a location specified by the author. Only the path is preserved in
Kingdom. You can change the source file outside of Kingdom. When expanded, linked file
PAKnotes are printable, along with the context window. The current displayed page is the
one printed. It is also printable as a standalone file from its application window, in which it
can be edited. These are external PAKnotes.
• File PAKnote; Imported is a PAKnote that is copied from a source file using the import
option. A duplicate of the original source file is made and saved in a PAKNotes folder
either within the active author’s folder or project directory. Each imported PAKnote has a
unique ID. The naming protocol is PAKnote00000xxxxx.ext, where the x’s represent the
PAKnote ID. The file extension .ext is identical to the source file application type
extension. These PAKnotes do reflect any changes made to the source file outside of
Kingdom. When expanded, imported file PAKnotes are printable along with the context
window. The current displayed page is the one printed. It is also printable as a standalone
file from its application window, in which it can be edited. These are internal PAKnotes.
• Web PAKnote is a PAKnote created using a website. Typical html websites, as well as
those that display (*.doc) or (*.pdf) files may be used. In expanded form, these PAKnotes
display only the website title. To view the website, the PAKnote must be opened using the
right mouse button menu. When expanded, web PAKnote titles are printable along with
the context window. However, the entire PAKnote is printable as a standalone website
from the web browser. These are external PAKnotes.
Each project contains a default PAKnote linked to an IHS Kingdom website called Web
References. This is a listing of many sources of additional information through various
websites. The websites are organized into seven different categories:
- Auditors
- Government Agencies
- Providers of Services/Studies/Databases
- Research Consortiums
- Seismic Data Acquisition, Processing, and Sales
- Societies
- Training

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 199

PAKnote icons

PAKnote icons
Icons represent the PAKnotes in Project Explorer, as well as on the base map and VSDs. For
each PAKnote, you can choose to use the Object icons or one of the Other icons.

Object icons
The object icons are the system-defined symbols associated with specific objects in the
project. To use the object icon, select Object Icon on the Creating PAKnotes or the Editing
PAKnote properties.
The nine object icons are shown in the figure below.
Figure 1 PAKnote Object Icons

Other icons
The other icons are additional symbols that may be associated with objects in the project in
lieu of the object icons. To use the object icon, select Choose Icon on the Creating PAKnotes
and select an icon using the down arrow.
The 12 other icons are shown below.
Figure 2 PAKnote Other Icons

200 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote icons

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 201

PAKnote object coordinates

PAKnote object coordinates

Each PAKnote within a context, or view, has a set of coordinates that identify it. However, not
all views support all objects.

Tip: Pass the cursor over the PAKnote’s name in Project Explorer to display its exact
coordinates. The coordinates are in parentheses following the object name.

The table below displays the intersections of the different map and vertical views with the
various objects. The check marks (P) indicate that the object will display, or is visible, on the
particular view.
The information in the box to the right of each check mark describes the type of coordinates
will be recorded with the PAKnote.
Blank boxes indicate that PAKnotes will not appear on that view for the particular object.

202 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote object coordinates

Intersections of Different Coordinates with Objects

Views

Vertical
Objects Vertical
Survey Time Slice Grid Horizo Fault Windo
Window
Map Map Map n Map Map w
(Depth)
(Time)

Borehol Well, Well, Wel Well Wel Well Well,

e MD MD l, ,MD l,M , MD
   MD   D  MD 

Fault Well Well,

Cut  ,  MD
MD

Formati Well Well,

on Top  ,  MD
MD

Grid  XY  XY  XY
Horizon Line Line Line,
, , Trace
 Trac  Trac 
e e

Fault  XY  XYZ  XYZ

3D Line, Line, Line Line,
Survey P, if Trac P, Z Trac , Trace
NU e within e,  Trac  ,
LLZ Tolerance T e, Z
Z

2D Surv Surv Surv Surve

Survey P, if ey, P, Z ey, ey, y,
NU Trac within Trac  Trac  Trace
LLZ e Tolerance e, e, ,
T Z Z

Point  XY  XY  XY  XY  XY  XYZ  XYZ

Project
Explorer

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 203

PAKnote object coordinates

The table below displays the intersections of the different coordinates with the various
objects.
The information within the first six columns describes which specific coordinates are recorded
for each object.
The information in the last two columns describes the PAKnote projection for each object.
Blank boxes indicate that coordinates are not recorded for the particular object.

204 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote object coordinates

Intersections of Different Coordinates with Objects

Coordinates

Objects PAKnote
Depth Does it
X Y Z, T Line Trace Projection
Type Project
Distance

Borehole MD Depth Yes Line-Trace

FaultCut MD Depth With Line-Trace

Borehole

Formation MD Depth With Line-Trace

Top Borehole

Grid X Y Time Yes X, Y

or
Depth

Horizon T, In- Crosslin Time Yes Line-Trace

TVD linear e or
Line or SP Depth

Fault X Y T, In-line Crosslin Time Yes Line-Trace

TVD or e or
Line or Depth
SP

3DSurvey X Y T, In-line Crosslin Time Yes Line-Trace

TVD or e or
Line or Depth
SP

2DSurvey X Y T, Line SP Time Yes Line-SP

TVD or
Depth

Point X Y T, Z Yes X, Y

ProjectTree No

Volume PAKnotes
• 2D and 3D survey, point, and fault PAKnotes are all considered volume PAKnotes.
• In addition to an Object ID that identifies the volume object, volume PAKnotes require X,
Y, and Z type information.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 205

PAKnote object coordinates

• Survey PAKnotes record line, trace, and Z (time or depth) coordinates so if a survey is
remapped, the PAKnote stays in same relative position on the survey. Placement is to
within one line and trace number for survey PAKnotes. 3D survey PAKnotes list the
survey name, along with the in-line, crossline, and Z coordinates. 2D survey PAKnotes list
the survey name along with the trace and Z coordinates. Time coordinates should be
within 10 milliseconds.
• Point and fault PAKnotes may record X, Y, and Z coordinates depending upon the context
view. Placement is to within one half of the bin spacing for point and fault PAKnotes.

Tip: The point note coordinates may fall beyond the project boundaries.

• Z coordinates are listed only if they exist where the PAKnote is anchored (i.e. the note
was created on a vertical display window).
• PAKnotes created from base map views will have a NULL Z type, and therefore will not
display on vertical views.
• PAKnotes created from vertical views will take the Z type of the view; but they will not
show on views of dissimilar Z type. In other words, the PAKnote’s Z type will not be
converted from time or depth when switching views.

Surface PAKnotes
• Horizons and grids are considered surfaces.
• In addition to an Object ID that identifies the surface object, surface PAKnotes require X
and Y coordinates.
• Horizon PAKnotes record line and trace coordinates. The survey is also listed. Placement
is to within one line and trace number for horizon PAKnotes.
• Grid PAKnotes record X and Y coordinates. Placement is to within one half of the bin
spacing for grid PAKnotes.
• As long as the surface exists in the display, it is in the correct Z type. The Z value is
extracted from the surface data. In essence, the Z value floats.

Note: Only PAKnotes associated with boreholes, formation tops, or fault cuts may
appear in the depth cross-section windows.

Line Object PAKnotes

• Boreholes are considered line objects.
• In addition on an Object ID that identifies the line object, line object PAKnotes require a
single coordinate.
• Borehole PAKnotes record the approximate measured depth coordinates and the well
name. Placement is within 200 feet for borehole PAKnotes.

206 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote object coordinates

Tip: When attempting to create a PAKnote on a borehole at a specific point, magnify the
area around that point. This is especially important when associating PAKnotes with
deviated wells.

Point-Like Object PAKnotes

• Formation tops and fault cuts are considered point-like objects.
• PAKnotes on point-like objects require only the Object ID.
• The location can be inferred completely from the object.
• Formation top and fault cut PAKnotes record the exact measured depth coordinates, the
well name, and the formation top or fault cut name. Placement should match the PAKnote
Location and Association coordinate exactly for formation top and fault cut PAKnotes.

Tip: When attempting to create a PAKnote on a formation top or fault cut, magnify the area
around the formation top or fault cut.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 207

PAKnote Examples

PAKnote Examples
The following are examples of PAKnotes.
• Example 1 - Associate a Spreadsheet to a Horizon
• Example 2 - Associate a website to a well
• Example 3 - Associate a bitmap to a fault within a VSD
• Example 4 - Associate a document to a formation top

208 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote Examples

Example 1 - Associate a Spreadsheet to a Horizon

The figure below shows an example of an expanded PAKnote with simple border style
associated with an amplitudes horizon. The PAKnote spreadsheet lists the horizon times at
each well location.
Figure 3 PAKnote Spreadsheet Associated with a Horizon

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 209

PAKnote Examples

Example 2 - Associate a website to a well

The figure below shows an example of an expanded website PAKnote with classic border
style associated with a borehole.
Figure 4 PAKnote Website Associated to a Well

210 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote Examples

Example 3 - Associate a bitmap to a fault within a VSD

The figure below shows an example of an expanded file PAKnote containing a bitmap
drawing associated with a fault. The bitmap depicts a map view of the gradient of the fault
surface. The PAKnote style is the clear border style.
Figure 5 PAKnote bitmap associated to a fault within a VSD

Example 4 - Associate a document to a formation top

The figure below shows an example of an iconized file PAKnote associated with a formation
top. The PAKnote’s position is at the anchor point and represents a document.
Figure 6 PAKnote document associated to a formation top

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 211

PAKnote Examples

212 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote dialog boxes

PAKnote dialog boxes

The following dialog boxes appear when working with PAKnotes.
• Creating PAKnotes
• Associateing PAKnotes with objects
• Linking PAKnotes to web (main menu)
• Linking PAKnotes to web (right mouse button menu)
• Editing PAKnote properties
• Rename PAKnote
• Display PAKnotes
• Copying PAKnote
• Deleting PAKnotes
• Warning

Creating PAKnotes
Use the Create tab of the PAKnotes Management dialog box (figure below) to create a
PAKnote.
Figure 7 PAKnotes Management dialog box—Create tab

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 213

PAKnote dialog boxes

The dialog box items are as follows:

• PAKnote Name—enter a unique name for PAKnote. The default is PAKnote. This is a
required field.
• Permissions—select the option that determines whether the original author or all authors
can view and edit the PAKnote; this can be set for the active author’s PAKnotes only:
- Private—only the original author can view and edit the PAKnote.
- Public—any authors can view and edit the PAKnote; however, only original authors
can re-associate or delete the PAKnote.
This selection persists as the default permission until the active author changes the
permissions for their PAKnotes. This field does not dictate which PAKnotes are displayed
in the Select PAKnote(s) field.
• Create Method—select how the PAKnote is to be created:
- New—use an application to create the PAKnote. Choosing this option activates the
Select a File type from the list of Recognized file types list; see Table for choices.
- From File—use a file to use as the PAKnote.

214 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote dialog boxes

• Link—directory link the PAKnote to the original source file; any changes to the source
file are reflected in the PAKnote. These are external PAKnotes.
• Import—use a copy of the source file; any changes to the source file do not appear in
the PAKnote. These are internal PAKnotes.
When this option is active, Browse also becomes active.
- From Web—use the contents of a web address as the PAKnote.
• PAKnote Location and Association—use these fields to associate the PAKnote with an
object.
- Object—displays the object the PAKnote is associated to. Project Explorer is the
default.
- Associate—click to select the object association for the PAKnote.
• Display Properties—set the display style:
- Border Style—set the boundary lines surrounding and expanded PAKnote; the
example changes as different styles are selected.
• Classic—use a straight-line border, with a shadow and a folded corner, with a light
yellow interior, as shown in the figure below. There is a title at the top of the PAKnote.
This is the default.
Figure 8 Classic Border Style

• Simple—use a simple border with a shadow, as shown in the figure below. The title is
not visible. The interior is clear.
Figure 9 Simple Border Style

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 215

PAKnote dialog boxes

• Clear—use no border nor background as shown in the figure blow. The title is not
visible.
Figure 10 Clear Border Style

- Line Color—set the line color to use to connect the PAKnote to the item. It is also the
color of the PAKnote’s frame.
- Show as Icon—check to show the PAKnote as an icon on the base map and VSD, as
shown in the figure below. If the PAKnote is shown as an icon, it cannot be read.
When unchecked, the PAKnote is displayed in its expanded state. This field is
persistent, meaning it remembers the selection used during the prior PAKnote
creation.
Figure 11 PAKnote Shown as an Icon

216 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote dialog boxes

- Icon Style—set the style of icon used to represent the PAKnote on Project Explorer,
base map, and VSD:
• Object Icon—use one of the nine different types of objects.
• Select Icon—use one of the 12 other icons.

Related Tasks
• Creating a PAKnote using a software application
• Creating a PAKnote that links to a file
• Creating a PAKnote that links to a web address

Associateing PAKnotes with objects

Use the Associate PAKnote With dialog box (figure below) to associate a PAKnote with an
object when creating a PAKnote.
Figure 12 Associate PAKnote With dialog box

Objects within the Associate PAKnote With dialog box adhere to the following order:

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 217

PAKnote dialog boxes

1. the set of objects encountered that are in the pick range of the cursor, listed in order of
their distance from the object point
2. the survey (if present).
3. the point for a (for a Point PAKnote, i.e. an X, Y, Z, or T PAKnote)
4. Project Explorer (for Project Explorer PAKnote)

Related Tasks
• Creating a PAKnote using a software application
• Creating a PAKnote that links to a file
• Creating a PAKnote that links to a web address

Linking PAKnotes to web (main menu)

Use the Link to Web dialog box to link PAKnotes to the sites listed in the dialog box.
When accessed from the main menu, this dialog box lists the instructions for adding web
addresses to the dialog box as shown in the figure below.
Figure 13 Link to web dialog box (main menu)—before view

After the web addresses have been added, the dialog box appears as shown below.
Figure 14 Link to Web dialog box (Main Menu)—Refresh Listed

218 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote dialog boxes

This dialog box lists recently accessed websites that have been added to the List field using
the Refresh List button.
The dialog box items are as follows:
• Title—shows the title of the website address as determined from the browser. The title is
used as the PAKnote name when creating the PAKnote. If no title is found, the web
address itself will be used. This entry cannot be edited.
• Web Address—shows the address of the website as determined from the browser. The
PAKnote is linked to this website address. This entry cannot be edited.
Typical html websites, as well as those that display (*.doc) or (*.pdf) files, may be used.
The most common protocol is http://, and it is used as the default. However, https://,
ftp://, and gopher:// are also supported.
• Launch Web Browser—launch the default web browser on your computer.
• Refresh List—refresh the list of web addresses on the Link to Web dialog box.
Web PAKnotes are always external PAKnotes. Any changes in the content of the source
website are reflected in the PAKnote.

Related Tasks
• Creating a PAKnote that links to a web address

Linking PAKnotes to web (right mouse button menu)

Use the Link to Web dialog box to link PAKnotes to websites using either the list displayed in
the dialog box or the website address manually entered.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 219

PAKnote dialog boxes

When accessed from the right mouse button menu, this dialog box lists the instructions for
adding web addresses to the dialog box, in addition to fields for manually entering the
information, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 15 Link to web dialog box (right mouse button menu)—before view

After the web addresses have been added, the dialog box appears as shown in the figure
below.
Figure 16 Link to Web dialog box (Right Mouse Button Menu)—Websites Listed

220 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote dialog boxes

This dialog box lists recently accessed websites that have been added to the List field using
the Refresh List button or manually entering the web address in the Web Address field.
The dialog box items are as follows:
• Title—shows the title of the website address as determined from the browser. The title is
used as the PAKnote name when creating the PAKnote. If no title is found, the web
address itself will be used. This field cannot be edited.
• Web Address—shows the address of the website as determined from the browser. The
PAKnote is linked to this website address. This field cannot be edited.
Typical html websites, as well as those that display (*.doc) or (*.pdf) files, may be used.
The most common protocol is http://, and it is used as the default. However, https://,
ftp://, and gopher:// are also supported.
• Launch Web Browser—launch the default web browser on your computer.
• Refresh List—refresh the list of web addresses on the Link to Web dialog box.
• PAKnote Name—enter the name of the PAK note.
• Web Address—enter the web address manually.
Web PAKnotes are always external PAKnotes. Any changes in the content of the source
website are reflected in the PAKnote.
If the web PAKnote is created using this dialog box, then new PAKnote appears in its
expanded state on the base map or vertical window attached to the object.
Web PAKnotes are always external PAKnotes. Any changes in the content of the source
website are reflected in the PAKnote.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 221

PAKnote dialog boxes

Related Tasks
• Creating a PAKnote that links to a web address

Editing PAKnote properties

Use the Properties tab of the PAKnote Management dialog box to rename, change the link
to files or the web, control the permissions, change the object association, and adjust the
display of PAKnotes throughout the project.

Dialog box items include:

• PAKnote Name—lists the name of the PAKnote. The default is PAKnote. This is a
required field. This field cannot be edited. To change the name of the PAKnote, click
Rename.
• Rename PAKnote—enter a new PAKnote name. If multiple PAKnotes are selected, then
this button is disabled.
• File Address—if the PAKnote is linked is a file, the file directory and path appear. If the
PAKnote is a private PAKnote, Browse is active. If the PAKnote is a public PAKnote,
Browse is inactive. If the PAKnote is linked to a website, the website address appears. If

222 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote dialog boxes

the PAKnote is a private PAKnote, Web is active. If the PAKnote is a public PAKnote,
Web is inactive.
• Browse—open a standard Windows Open dialog box so you can select another file if
needed. If multiple PAKnotes are selected or the PAKnote is a public PAKnote, then this
field is disabled.
• Web—open the Linking PAKnotes to web (main menu) so you can update the web
address if needed. If multiple PAKnotes are selected or the PAKnote is a public PAKnote,
then this button is disabled.
• Permissions—select the option that indicates who can view and edit the PAKnote; these
settings are active for only the active author’s PAKnotes:
- Private—only the original author can view and edit the PAKnote.
- Public—any authors can view and edit the PAKnote; only original authors can re-
associate or delete by the PAKnote
This selection persists as the default permission until the active author changes the
permissions for their PAKnotes. This field does not dictate which PAKnotes are displayed
in the Select PAKnote(s) field.
• Linked—indicates that this PAKnote uses the original source file and will reflect any edits
within the source file. These are external PAKnotes. If multiple PAKnotes are selected
and the link status is mixed, then this field is disabled. This field cannot be changed.
• Not Linked—indicates that this PAKnote uses a copy of the original source file. The
PAKnote will not reflect any edits to the source file and edits to the copy do not affect the
original. These are internal PAKnotes. The connection type for non-linked PAKnotes may
not be changed. If multiple PAKnotes are selected and the link status is mixed, then this
field is disabled. This field cannot be changed.
• Select PAKnote(s)—lists all the active author’s private PAKnotes and all other author’s
public PAKnotes in the project. The icon that represents its object accompanies each
PAKnote. The corresponding properties for that selected PAKnote display on the right
side of the dialog box. The PAKnote order is based on Project Explorer and List Order
selection in the Project>User Preferences>General tab.
Either highlight the PAKnote in the list of PAKnotes or complete the following fields to
select the PAKnote.
- Search—to easily locate a PAKnote in a long list, enter the first few alphanumeric
characters and/or wild cards to locate PAKnotes beginning with the characters
entered. The first PAKnote that matches the items entered will be highlighted and
moved to the top of the list.
- Filter—this button becomes active after you enter a search string in Search. Click
this button to show only those items that meet the search string entered in Search.
- Reset—click this button to display the original list.

Tip: Pass the cursor over the PAKnote name to display the entire PAKnote context, which
includes the object icon and the PAKnote name, then the PAKnote object, the anchor
point coordinates, and the author follow in parentheses.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 223

PAKnote dialog boxes

• PAKnote Location and Association—use these fields to associate the PAKnote with an
object.
- Object—displays the object the PAKnote is associated to. Project Explorer is the
default.
- Associate—click to select the object association for the PAKnote.
• Display Properties—set the display properties for how the PAKnote is displayed in the
base map and VSD.
- Border Style—set the boundary lines surrounding and expanded PAKnote, either
Classic (Figure 8), Simple (Figure 9), or Clear (Figure 10).
- Line Color—set the line color to use to connect the PAKnote to the item. It is also the
color of the PAKnote’s frame.
- Show as Icon—check to show the PAKnote as an icon on the base map and VSD, as
shown in Figure 11. If the PAKnote is shown as an icon, it cannot be read. When
unchecked, the PAKnote is displayed in its expanded state. This field is persistent,
meaning it remembers the selection used during the prior PAKnote creation.
- Icon Style—set the style of icon used to represent the PAKnote on Project Explorer,
base map, and VSD:
• Object Icon—use one of the nine different types of objects.
• Select Icon—use one of the 12 other icons.

Related Tasks
• Update a PAKnote

Rename PAKnote
Use the Rename PAKnote dialog box to rename a PAKnote.
Dialog box items include:
• From—lists the current PAKnote name.
• To—enter a new PAKnote name.

Related Tasks
• Change the PAKnote name

Display PAKnotes
Use the Display tab of the PAKnote Management dialog box to control which PAKnotes are
available as the working set.
A project may contain 50 PAKnotes, but the user may only want five to be displayed in the
base map or VSD at any given time. The user has the option to select those PAKnotes as the
working set.

224 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote dialog boxes

Dialog box items include:

• Display Working Set—when checked, displays all selected PAKnotes. When
unchecked, no PAKnotes display. This is equivalent to the PAKnotes checkbooks in
Project Explorer.
• Permissions—are active for only the active author’s PAKnotes; determines whether only
the original author or all authors can view and edit the PAKnote:
- Private—only the original author can view and edit the PAKnote.
- Public—any authors can view and edit the PAKnote; only original authors can re-
associate or delete by the PAKnote
This selection persists as the default permission until the active author changes the
permissions for their PAKnotes. This field does not dictate which PAKnotes are displayed
in the Select PAKnote(s) field
• Select PAKnotes to Display—lists all the active author’s private PAKnotes and all other
author’s public PAKnotes in the project. The icon that represents its object accompanies
each PAKnote. The PAKnote order is based on Project Explorer and List Order
selection in the Project>User Preferences>General tab.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 225

PAKnote dialog boxes

Either highlight the PAKnote in the list of PAKnotes or complete the following fields to
select the PAKnote.
- Search—to easily locate a PAKnote in a long list, enter the first few alphanumeric
characters and/or wild cards to locate PAKnotes beginning with the characters
entered. The first PAKnote that matches the items entered will be highlighted and
moved to the top of the list.
- Filter—this button becomes active after you enter a search string in Search. Click
this button to show only those items that meet the search string entered in Search.
- Reset—click this button to display the original list.

Tip: Pass the cursor over the PAKnote name to display the entire PAKnote context, which
includes the object icon and the PAKnote name, then the PAKnote object, the anchor
point coordinates, and the author follow in parentheses.

• >—move the PAKnote selected in Select PAKnotes to Display to Display List.

• <—move the PAKnote select in Display List to Select PAKnotes to Display.
• >>—move all PAKnote in Select PAKnotes to Display to Display List.
• <<—move all PAKnote in Display List to Select PAKnotes to Display.
• PAKnote Preview—provides a quick view of the selected PAKnote’s contents. This field
is not available when more than one PAKnote is selected. Web notes may not be
previewed.
- Preview—check to display a miniature version of the selected PAKnote.
- Open—open the selected PAKnote full-sized in its application window.
• Display List—lists all of the PAKnotes that have been selected for display. This is the
current working set. The icon that represents its object accompanies each PAKnote.

Tip: Pass the cursor over the PAKnote name to display the entire PAKnote context, which
includes the object icon and the PAKnote name, then the PAKnote object, the anchor
point coordinates, and the author follow in parentheses.

• Pointer Behavior—describes how the PAKnote is positioned on base maps and vertical
windows.
- Draw Pointer to Icon—offsets either the icon or the expanded PAKnote from the
anchor point. The icon or the expanded PAKnote is connected to the anchor by a
straight line, which is the pointer line. This is the default.
- Draw Icon at Anchor—positions the PAKnote directly over the anchor point. When in
the iconized state, no pointer is used. When in the expanded state, the PAKnote is
connected using the pointer line.

Related Tasks
• Create a working set

226 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote dialog boxes

Copying PAKnote
Use the Copy tab of the PAKnote Management dialog box to create a new PAKnote from an
existing PAKnote in the project.

These copied PAKnotes are associated with the same object as the original PAKnotes.
On the base map or VSD, the pointer line of the copy will tie to the same anchor point as the
original PAKnote.
Dialog box items include:
• Select PAKnotes to Copy—lists all the active author’s private PAKnotes and all other
author’s public PAKnotes in the project. The icon that represents its object accompanies
each PAKnote. The PAKnote order is based on Project Explorer and List Order
selection in the Project>User Preferences>General tab.
Either highlight the PAKnote in the list of PAKnotes or complete the following fields to
select the PAKnote.
- Search—to easily locate a PAKnote in a long list, enter the first few alphanumeric
characters and/or wild cards to locate PAKnotes beginning with the characters

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 227

PAKnote dialog boxes

entered. The first PAKnote that matches the items entered will be highlighted and
moved to the top of the list.
- Filter—this button becomes active after you enter a search string in Search. Click
this button to show only those items that meet the search string entered in Search.
- Reset—click this button to display the original list.

Tip: Pass the cursor over the PAKnote name to display the entire PAKnote context, which
includes the object icon and the PAKnote name, then the PAKnote object, the anchor
point coordinates, and the author follow in parentheses.

• Copy Type—select the type of copy; this is available for either a single PAKnote or a set
of PAKnotes.
- Link—directly link the PAKnote copy to the original PAKnote source file. The prefix
Link to is added to the new PAKnote name.
- Duplicate—make a copy of the PAKnote and stores it in the project directory. The
prefix Copy of is added to the new PAKnote name. This copy is linked to a copy of the
source file. This is the default.
• PAKnote Preview—provides a quick view of the selected PAKnote’s contents. This field
is not available when more than one PAKnote is selected. Web notes cannot be
previewed.
- Preview—check to display a miniature version of the selected PAKnote.
- Open—open the selected PAKnote full-sized in its application window.
• New Name—enter a unique name for the PAKnote.

Related Tasks
• Copying PAKnotes

Deleting PAKnotes
Use the Delete tab of the PAKnotes Management dialog box to permanently remove
PAKnotes from the project, with the following restrictions:
• PAKnotes may only be deleted by their original author.
• Multiple PAKnotes can be deleted at one time.
• When linked notes are deleted, the original source file remains intact.
• When non-linked notes are deleted, the PAKnote is removed from the project but the
internal copy of the original source file remains in the PAKNotes folder, either within the
active author’s folder or the project directory.

Warning: The delete operation is irreversible.

228 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote dialog boxes

Dialog box items include:

• Permissions—select one of the following options to display that type of PAKnotes in the
list.
- Private—display all private PAKnotes created by the active author.
- Public—display all public PAKnotes created by the active author.
• Select PAKnotes To Delete—lists all the active author’s public or private PAKnotes in
the project. The icon that represents its object accompanies each PAKnote. The PAKnote
order is based on Project Explorer and List Order selection in the Project>User
Preferences>General tab.
Either highlight the PAKnote in the list of PAKnotes or complete the following fields to
select the PAKnote.
- Search—to easily locate a PAKnote in a long list, enter the first few alphanumeric
characters and/or wild cards to locate PAKnotes beginning with the characters
entered. The first PAKnote that matches the items entered will be highlighted and
moved to the top of the list.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 229

PAKnote dialog boxes

- Filter—this button becomes active after you enter a search string in Search. Click
this button to show only those items that meet the search string entered in Search.
- Reset—click this button to display the original list.

Tip: Pass the cursor over the PAKnote name to display the entire PAKnote context, which
includes the object icon and the PAKnote name, then the PAKnote object, the anchor
point coordinates, and the author follow in parentheses.

• >—move the PAKnote selected in Select PAKnotes to Delete to PAKnotes To Be

Deleted.
• <—move the PAKnote select in PAKnotes To Be Deleted to Select PAKnotes to
Delete.
• >>—move all PAKnote in Select PAKnotes to Delete to PAKnotes To Be Deleted.
• <<—move all PAKnote in PAKnotes To Be Deleted to Select PAKnotes to Delete.
• PAKnote Preview—provides a quick view of the selected PAKnote’s contents. This field
is not available when more than one PAKnote is selected. Web notes may not be
previewed.
- Preview—check to display a miniature version of the selected PAKnote.
- Open—open the selected PAKnote full-sized in its application window.
• PAKnotes To Be Deleted—lists the PAKnotes that have been selected for deletion.
Either highlight the PAKnote in the list of PAKnotes or complete the following fields to
select the PAKnote.
- Search—to easily locate a PAKnote in a long list, enter the first few alphanumeric
characters and/or wild cards to locate PAKnotes beginning with the characters
entered. The first PAKnote that matches the items entered will be highlighted and
moved to the top of the list.
- Filter—this button becomes active after you enter a search string in Search. Click
this button to show only those items that meet the search string entered in Search.
- Reset—click this button to display the original list.

Tip: Pass the cursor over the PAKnote name to display the entire PAKnote context, which
includes the object icon and the PAKnote name, then the PAKnote object, the anchor
point coordinates, and the author follow in parentheses.

Related Tasks
• Delete a PAKnote

Creating PAKnote from File

Use the Create PAKnote From File dialog box as a shortcut method to create a PAKnote on
the base map or VSD and select a file to use as the new PAKnotes.

230 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote dialog boxes

This type of PAKnote is created with private permissions.

Dialog box items include:

• File Name—enter the name of the file used as the PAKnote or click Browse to navigate
to the file.
• Link—directly link the PAKnote to the original source file; the location of the file appears.
Kingdom does not save a copy and the PAKnote is separate from the project. Only the
path is preserved in Kingdom. These PAKnotes will reflect any changes made to the
source file outside Kingdom and are external PAKnotes.
• Import—use a copy of the original source file. A duplicate of the original source file is
made and saved in a PAKnotes folder either within the active author’s folder or project
directory. Each imported PAKnote will have a unique ID. The naming protocol is PAKnote
00000xxxxx, where the x’s represent the PAKnote ID. The PAKnote file extension is
identical to the source file application type extension. These PAKnotes will not reflect any
changes made to the source file outside Kingdom. These are internal PAKnotes.

Related Tasks
• Creating a PAKnote from a file directly on the base Map or VSD

Warning
The Warning dialog box appears if the original context, or a portion of it, is no longer
available. For example, a well was deleted but it had a PAKnote attached to it.
The PAKnote can either be converted to a PAKnote without context, which means it will be
attached to Project Explorer; or it can be deleted.
Figure 17 Warning dialog box for Deleted Object with Associated PAKnote

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 231

PAKnote dialog boxes

Related Tasks
• Convert or delete a PAKnote whose associated object has been deleted

232 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

PAKnote tasks
You can perform the following tasks when working with PAKnotes:
• Creating a PAKnote to store your information in
• Copying PAKnotes to reuse the information from an existing PAKnote
• View PAKnotes to change the view
• Update a PAKnote to change the properties
• Print PAKnotes
• Delete a PAKnote to remove files that are no longer used
• Convert or delete a PAKnote whose associated object has been deleted

Creating a PAKnote
When you create a PAKnote, you can:
• Creating a PAKnote using a software application
• Creating a PAKnote that links to a file
• Creating a PAKnote using a copy of a file
• Creating a PAKnote that links to a web address
• Creating a PAKnote from a file directly on the base Map or VSD

Tips for creating PAKnotes

• When attempting to create a PAKnote on a borehole at a specific point, magnify the area
around that point. This is especially important when associating PAKnotes with deviated
wells.
• When attempting to create a PAKnote on a formation top or fault cut, magnify the area
around the formation top or fault cut.
• The point note coordinates may fall beyond the project boundaries.

Creating a PAKnote using a software application

You can create a PAKnote using any of the applications that use the file extensions listed in
the PAKnotes Templates folder in the directory where you installed Kingdom.
To create a PAKnote using a software application, follow these steps:
1. Access the PAKnote Management dialog box using one of the following methods:
• From The Kingdom software menu, click Project > PAKnotes Management.
• Double click the PAKnotes folder in Project Explorer. The PAKnotes Management
dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.
• Right-click in the base map or VSD and choose PAKnote Management.

Note: You can also create a private PAKnote by right-clicking a borehole, formation
top, fault cut, grid, horizon, fault, survey, or point in the base map or in the

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 233

PAKnote tasks

VSD and choosing Create PAKnote > New > application. The Associate
PAKnote With dialog box appears. Go to step 4c.

The PAKnotes Management dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.
2. Click the Create tab if it is not active.
Figure 18 PAKnotes Management dialog box—Create Tab for New PAKnote

3. Complete the fields as follows. For a complete explanation of the fields, see Creating
PAKnotes.
• PAKnote Name—enter the name for the new PAKnote. This is a required field.
• Permissions—select one of the following options for PAKnote viewing:
- Private—turn on to restrict viewing of the PAKnote to the original author
- Public—turn on to allow all authors to view and edit the PAKnote; only original
authors can re-associate or delete by the PAKnote
• Create Method—turn on New.

234 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

• Select a File type from the list of Recognized file types—select the type of file to
be used for the PAKnote, as shown in Table . For more information about file types
and applications, see Application.

Tip: If you need to add formatting to a PAKnote, such as changing the size of the font within
the PAKnote, create the PAKnote as a *.doc (Word) type. Text cannot be formatted in
PAKnotes in the file types of *.txt and *.rtf.

• Display Properties—select the following options to set the display style:

- Border Style—turn on one of the border styles, as shown in Figure 8 through
Figure 10.
- Line Color—select the line color to use to connect the PAKnote to the item. It is
also the color of the PAKnote’s frame.
- Show as Icon—check this box to show the PAKnote as an icon on the base map
and VSD, as shown in Figure 11. If the PAKnote is shown as an icon, it cannot be
read. When unchecked, the PAKnote is displayed in its expanded state. This field
is persistent, meaning it remembers the selection used during the prior PAKnote
creation.
- Icon Style—select one of the following options to select the style of icon used to
represent the PAKnote on Project Explorer, base map, and VSD. For more
information about the icons, see Object.
• Object Icon—turn on to use the appropriate icon for the nine different types of
objects.
• Select Icon—turn on to use one of the 12 other icons.
4. To associate a PAKnote with an object other than Project Explorer, follow these steps:

Note: A base map or VSD must be active to use this feature.

a. Click Associate; on the base map or VSD, the cursor turns to an anchor .
b. Click the item to associate the PAKnote with; the Associateing PAKnotes with objects
dialog box appears.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 235

PAKnote tasks

c. Select the item to associate the PAKnote with.

d. Click OK. The name of the item appears in PAKnote Location and Association on
the PAKnotes Management dialog box.
5. Click Apply or OK.
The application that you selected to use to create the PAKnote opens. For example, if you
selected to create a PAKnote using Word, Word opens.

Note: If an error message appears, see View PAKnotes for more information.

6. Enter the information for the PAKnote.

7. Save the PAKnote according to the save instructions for the application.
The PAKnote is saved in a PAKnotes folder either within the active author’s folder or
project directory. Each new PAKnote has a unique ID. The naming protocol is
PAKnote00000xxxxx.ext, where the x’s represent the PAKnote ID. The PAKnote file
extension .ext is identical to the application type extension.
8. Close the application.

Creating a PAKnote that links to a file

To create a PAKnote that links to a file, follow these steps:

Note: When you link to a file, any changes in the source file are reflected in the PAKnote.

1. Access the PAKnote Management dialog box using one of the following methods:
• From The Kingdom software menu, click Project> PAKnotes Management.
• Double-click the PAKnotes folder in Project Explorer. The PAKnotes Management
dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.

236 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

• Right-click in the base map or VSD and choose PAKnote Management.

Note: You can also create a private PAKnote by right-clicking a borehole, formation
top, fault cut, grid, horizon, fault, survey, or point in the base map or in the
VSD and choosing Create PAKnote > File. The Associate PAKnote With
dialog box appears. Go to step 5c.

The PAKnotes Management dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.
2. Click the Create tab if it is not active.
Figure 19 PAKnotes Management dialog box—Create Tab for Linked File

3. Complete the fields as follows:

• PAKnote Name—enter the name for the new PAKnote. The default is PAKnote. This
is a required field.
• Permissions—select one of the following options for PAKnote viewing:
- Private—turn on to restrict viewing of the PAKnote to the original author

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 237

PAKnote tasks

- Public—turn on to allow all authors to view and edit the PAKnote; only original
authors can re-associate or delete by the PAKnote
• Create Method—turn on From File and Link.
This adds a link to the original source file. The PAKnote is separate from the project
and stored at a location specified by the author. Only the path is preserved in
Kingdom. You can change the source file outside of Kingdom and see the changes in
Kingdom. When expanded, linked file PAKnotes are printable, along with the context
window. The current displayed page is the one printed. It is also printable as a
standalone file from its application window, in which it can be edited. These are
external PAKnotes.
4. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the file. Highlight the file and click Open.
The file name appears in the box besides Browse in the PAKnote Management dialog
box.
5. To associate a PAKnote with an item other than Project Explorer, follow these steps:

Note: A base map or VSD must be active to use this feature.

a. Click Associate; on the base map or VSD, the cursor turns to an anchor .
b. Click the item to associate the PAKnote with; the Associateing PAKnotes with objects
dialog box appears.
c. Select the item to associate the PAKnote with.
d. Click OK. The name of the item appears in the PAKnote Location and Association
field.
6. In Display Properties, select the following options to set the display style for the
PAKnote.
• Border Style—turn on one of the border styles shown in Figure 8 through Figure 10.
• Line Color—select the line color to use to connect the PAKnote to the item. It is also
the color of the PAKnote’s frame.
• Show as Icon—check this box to show the PAKnote as an icon on the base map and
VSD, as shown in Figure 11. If the PAKnote is shown as an icon, it cannot be read.
When unchecked, the PAKnote is displayed in its expanded state. This field is
persistent, meaning it remembers the selection used during the prior PAKnote
creation.
• Icon Style—select one of the following options to select the style of icon used to
represent the PAKnote on Project Explorer, base map, and VSD:
- Object Icon—turn on to use the appropriate icon for the nine different types of
objects shown in Figure 1.
- Select Icon—click to use one of the 12 other icons shown in Figure 2.
7. Click Apply or OK.
The file that you selected as the PAKnote opens.

238 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

Note: If an error message appears, see View PAKnotes for more information.

8. Update the PAKnote if needed.

9. Save the PAKnote according to the save instructions for the application.
10. Close the application that the PAKnote was created in.

Creating a PAKnote using a copy of a file

To create a PAKnote that imports a copy of the source file, follow these steps:

Note: When you use a copy of a source file, any changes in the source file are not reflected
in the PAKnote.

1. Access the PAKnote Management dialog box using one of the following methods:
• From The Kingdom software menu, click Project> PAKnotes Management.
• Double-click the PAKnotes folder in Project Explorer. The PAKnotes Management
dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.
• Right-click in the base map or VSD and choose PAKnote Management.

Note: You can also create a private PAKnote by right-clicking a borehole, formation
top, fault cut, grid, horizon, fault, survey, or point in the base map or in the
VSD and choosing Create PAKnote > File. The Associate PAKnote With
dialog box appears. Go to step 5c.

The PAKnotes Management dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.
2. Click the Create tab if it is not active.
Figure 20 PAKnotes Management dialog box—Create tab for Copied File

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 239

PAKnote tasks

3. Complete the fields as follows:

• PAKnote Name—enter the name for the new PAKnote. The default is PAKnote. This
is a required field.
• Permissions—select one of the following options for PAKnote viewing:
- Private—turn on to restrict viewing of the PAKnote to the original author
- Public—turn on to allow all authors to view and edit the PAKnote; only original
authors can re-associate or delete by the PAKnote
• Create Method—turn on From File and Import.
A copy of the original source file is saved in a PAKnotes folder either within the active
author’s folder or project directory. Each imported PAKnote will have a unique ID. The
naming protocol is PAKnote00000xxxxx.ext, where the x’s represent the PAKnote
ID. The PAKnote .ext file extension is identical to the source file application type
extension. These PAKnotes will not reflect any changes made to the source file
outside Kingdom. These are internal PAKnotes.

240 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

4. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the file. Highlight the file and click Open.
The file name appears in the box besides Browse in the PAKnotes Management dialog
box.
5. To associate a PAKnote with an item other than Project Explorer, follow these steps:

Note: A base map or VSD must be active to use this feature.

a. Click Associate; on the base map or VSD, the cursor turns to an anchor .
b. Click the item to associate the PAKnote with; the Associateing PAKnotes with objects
dialog box appears.
c. Select the item to associate the PAKnote with.
d. Click OK. The name of the item appears in the PAKnote Location and Association
field.
6. In Display Properties, select the following options to set the display style for the
PAKnote.
• Border Style—turn on one of the border styles shown in Figure 8 through Figure 10.
• Line Color—select the line color to use to connect the PAKnote to the item. It is also
the color of the PAKnote’s frame.
• Show as Icon—check this box to show the PAKnote as an icon on the base map and
VSD, as shown in Figure 11. If the PAKnote is shown as an icon, it cannot be read.
When unchecked, the PAKnote is displayed in its expanded state. This field is
persistent, meaning it remembers the selection used during the prior PAKnote
creation.
• Icon Style—select one of the following options to select the style of icon used to
represent the PAKnote on Project Explorer, base map, and VSD:
- Object Icon—click to use the appropriate icon for the nine different types of
objects shown in Figure 1.
- Select Icon—click to use one of the 12 other icons shown in Figure 2.
7. Click Apply or OK.
The file that you selected as the PAKnote opens.

Note: If an error message appears, see View PAKnotes for more information.

8. Update the PAKnote if needed.

Caution: Any changes you make in the file will not be reflected in the source file. The
changes will only be applied to the copy of the file used as the PAKnote.

9. Save the PAKnote according to the save instructions for the application.
10. Close the application that the PAKnote was created in.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 241

PAKnote tasks

Creating a PAKnote that links to a web address

You can create a PAKnote that links to a web addresses using one of the following options:
• Linking to a web address using the PAKnotes Management dialog box
• Link to a Web Address Using the Create PAKnote > Web Option in Right Mouse Button
Menu
• Link to a Web Address Using the Create PAKnote > Web Option in Right Mouse Button
Menu

Linking to a web address using the PAKnotes Management dialog box

To create a PAKnote by navigating to a web address from the PAKnote Management dialog
box, follow these steps:
1. Access the PAKnotes Management dialog box using one of the following methods:
• From The Kingdom software menu, click Project> PAKnotes Management.
• Double click the PAKnotes folder in Project Explorer. The PAKnotes Management
dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.
• Right-click in the base map or VSD and choose PAKnotes Management.
The PAKnotes Management dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.

Note: You can also create a private PAKnote by right-clicking a borehole, formation top,
fault cut, grid, horizon, fault, survey, or point in the base map or the VSD and
choosing Create PAKnote > Web or Web Reference. For more information, see
Link to a Web Address Using the Create PAKnote > Web Option in Right Mouse
Button Menu.

2. Click the Create tab if it is not active.

Figure 21 PAKnotes Management dialog box—Create tab for Web Address

242 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

3. Complete the fields as follows:

• PAKnote Name—enter the name for the new PAKnote. The default is PAKnote. This
is a required field.
• Permissions—select one of the following options for PAKnote viewing:
- Private—turn on to restrict viewing of the PAKnote to the original author
- Public—turn on to allow all authors to view and edit the PAKnote; only original
authors can re-associate or delete by the PAKnote
This selection persists as the default permission until the selection is changed. This
field does not dictate which PAKnotes are displayed in the Select PAKnote(s) field.
• Create Method—click From Web.
4. To select a web address, click Web. The Linking PAKnotes to web (main menu) dialog
box opens.
Figure 22 Link to Web dialog box (from PAKnotes Management dialog box)

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 243

PAKnote tasks

5. Select the web address as follows:

a. Click Launch Web Browser. The Internet browser window for your computer’s
designated browser opens.
b. Navigate to the web page to be used as the PAKnote.
c. In the Link to Web dialog box, click Refresh List to add the web address to the list.
d. Highlight the web address and click OK. The web address appears in the Web
Address field of the Create tab of the PAKnotes Management dialog box.

Tip: To add multiple titles and addresses to the List field, open multiple browsers. If you
change the web address in browser window that is already open and click Refresh List,
that web address will overwrite the web address shown in the list.

To remove website titles and addresses from the List field, delete the browser’s history.

6. To associate a PAKnote with an item other than Project Explorer, follow these steps:

Note: A base map or VSD must be active to use this feature.

a. Click Associate; on the base map or VSD, the cursor turns to an anchor .
b. Click the item to associate the PAKnote with; the Associateing PAKnotes with objects
dialog box appears.
c. Select the item to associate the PAKnote with.
d. Click OK. The name of the item appears in the PAKnote Location and Association
field.

244 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

7. In Display Properties, select the following options to set the display style for the
PAKnote.
• Border Style—turn on one of the border styles shown in Figure 8 through Figure 10.
• Line Color—select the line color to use to connect the PAKnote to the item. It is also
the color of the PAKnote’s frame.
• Show as Icon—check this box to show the PAKnote as an icon on the base map and
VSD, as shown in Figure 11. If the PAKnote is shown as an icon, it cannot be read.
When unchecked, the PAKnote is displayed in its expanded state. This field is
persistent, meaning it remembers the selection used during the prior PAKnote
creation.
• Icon Style—select one of the following options to select the style of icon used to
represent the PAKnote on Project Explorer, base map, and VSD:
- Object Icon—click to use the appropriate icon for the nine different types of
objects shown in Figure 1.
- Select Icon—click to use one of the 12 other icons shown in Figure 2.
8. Click Apply or OK.
The web page that you selected as the PAKnote opens. The site is not saved in the
author’s PAKnotes subfolder, but resides in its original location and Kingdom saves the
path.

Note: If an error message appears, see View PAKnotes for more information.

9. Close the web browser.

Link to a Web Address Using the Create PAKnote > Web Option in Right Mouse
Button Menu
To create a private PAKnote by navigating to a web address from the right-mouse-button
menu, follow these steps:
1. Right click a borehole, formation top, fault cut, grid, horizon, fault, survey, or point in the
base map or right click in the VSD and choose Create PAKnote > Web.
Associateing PAKnotes with objects dialog box appears.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 245

PAKnote tasks

2. Select the item to associate the PAKnote with.

3. Click OK. The Link to Web dialog box appears.
Figure 23 Link to Web dialog box (Right Mouse Button Menu)—Before View

4. Select the website using one of the following methods:

• Manually enter the website by typing the web address and click OK. The webpage
associated with the address entered opens and the name of the page is used as the
PAKnote name. Close the web browser.
• Navigate to the webpage using the following steps:
- Click Launch Web Browser to open your default web browser. The browser
displays the PAKnotes Web References webpage.

246 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

- Select one of the websites listed on the PAKnotes Web References webpage or
navigate to the website to be used as the PAKnote.
- Click Refresh List. The web address is listed in the Link to Web dialog box and
the name of the webpage is used as the PAKnote name, as shown in Figure 16.
Figure 24 Link to Web dialog box (Right Mouse Button Menu)—Single Website Listed

Tip: To add multiple titles and addresses to the List field, open multiple browsers and
navigate to the webpages. Then click Refresh List. The selected websites will appear
in the Link to Web dialog box, as shown in Figure 25.

To remove website titles and addresses from the List field, delete the browser’s history.

Figure 25 Link to Web dialog box (Right Mouse Button Menu)—Websites Listed

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 247

PAKnote tasks

Note: If an error message appears, see View PAKnotes for more information.

5. Close the web browser.

Linking a PAKnote to a web address using the Create PAKnote > Web Reference
option in the right mouse button menu
To create a private PAKnote by navigating to a web address from the right-mouse-button
menu, follow these steps:
1. Right click a borehole, formation top, fault cut, grid, horizon, fault, survey, or point in the
base map or right click in the VSD and choose Create PAKnote > Web References.
Associateing PAKnotes with objects dialog box appears.

248 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

2. Select the item to associate the PAKnote with.

3. Click OK. The Link to Web dialog box appears and your default browser opens, showing
the PAKnotes Web References page.
Figure 26 Link to Web dialog box (Right Mouse Button Menu)—Before View

Figure 27 Web Reference Page

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 249

PAKnote tasks

4. Select the website from the list. That page appears in the browser.
5. Click Refresh List. The web address is listed in the Link to Web dialog box and the name
of the webpage is used as the PAKnote name, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 28 Link to Web dialog box (Right Mouse Button Menu)—Single Website Listed

250 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

Tip: To add multiple titles and addresses to the List field, open multiple browsers and
navigate to the webpages. Then click Refresh List. The selected websites will appear
in the Link to Web dialog box, as shown in the figure above.

To remove website titles and addresses from the List field, delete the browser’s history.

Figure 29 Link to Web dialog box (Right Mouse Button Menu)—Websites Listed

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 251

PAKnote tasks

Note: If an error message appears, see View PAKnotes for more information.

6. Close the web browser.

Creating a PAKnote from a file directly on the base Map or VSD

To create a private PAKnote directly on the base map or VSD, follow these steps:
1. Right mouse click one of the specified objects: borehole, formation top, fault cut, grid,
horizon, fault, survey, or point.
2. Choose Create PAKnote > File. The Associate PAKnote With dialog box opens.

252 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

3. Select the object to associate the PAKnote with. The Create PAKnote From File dialog
box opens.

4. Either enter the file name (including complete path) or click Browse to navigate to and
select a file.
5. Select one of the following options:
• Link—link to the location of the original source file.
This adds a link to the original source file. The PAKnote is separate from the project
and stored at a location specified by the author. Only the path is preserved in
Kingdom. You can change the source file outside of Kingdom and see the changes in
Kingdom. When expanded, linked file PAKnotes are printable, along with the context
window. The current displayed page is the one printed. It is also printable as a
standalone file from its application window, in which it can be edited. These are
external PAKnotes.
• Import—use a copy of the original source file.
A copy of the original source file is saved in a PAKnotes folder either within the active
author’s folder or project directory. Each imported PAKnote will have a unique ID. The
naming protocol is PAKnote00000xxxxx.ext, where the x’s represent the PAKnote
ID. The PAKnote .ext file extension is identical to the source file application type

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 253

PAKnote tasks

extension. These PAKnotes will not reflect any changes made to the source file
outside Kingdom. These are internal PAKnotes.
6. Click OK to create the PAKnote. The new PAKnote will then appear in its expanded state
on the base map or vertical window attached to the object.

PAKnote creation error messages

The following error messages may appear during PAKnote creation.
• If the PAKnote name field is left empty, name missing error message appears when you
click OK or Apply.“Please Specify a Name For you New PAKnote”.
Click OK and enter a name for the PAKnote.
• If the PAKnote name already exists, the following message appears when you click OK or
Apply: “The Given PAKnote is already Taken, please use a different PAKnote name”.
Click OK and enter a unique name for the PAKnote.
• If the file name or path is incorrect, or if the file has been removed, the following message
appears when you click OK or Apply: “The specified file could not be linked to, it does not
exist”.
Click OK, and enter the correct file and path.
• If a website address has not been entered completely, the following message appears.
“The URL is improperly formed, please enter a different Web Address”.
Correct the website address and continue with PAKnote creation.
• If the website address is not available or entered incorrectly, the Page cannot be
displayed message appears.
Correct the website address and continue with PAKnote creation.

Copying PAKnotes
You can copy a PAKnote on the base map or VSD by using the right mouse button menu or
the keyboard. You can also copy a PAKnote on Project Explorer by using the right mouse
button menu. The copies will have the same properties of the original PAKnote.

Copy a PAKnote on the Base Map using the RMB menu

To copy a PAKnote on the Base Menu using the RMB menu, follow these steps:
1. Select on an iconized or expanded PAKnote on a base map or VSD using the right mouse
button.
2. Choose PAKnote > Copy. This places the PAKnote on the clipboard to await pasting.
3. Right mouse click the object with which to associate the PAKnote copy.
4. Choose Paste PAKnote or Paste PAKnote Link from the pop-up menu. The Associate
PAKnote With dialog box opens.
5. Select the object with which to associate the PAKnote and click OK.

254 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

If the Paste PAKnotes command is used, the PAKnote’s name will be Copy of and the
original PAKnote’s name. If the Paste PAKnote Link command is used, the PAKnote’s
name will be Link to and the original PAKnote’s name. The new PAKnote will appear in
Project Explorer.

Coping a PAKnote on the Base Map or VSD using the keyboard

To copy a PAKnote on the base map or VSD using the keyboard, follow these steps:
1. Click a PAKnote on the base map or VSD.
2. Press Ctrl+C. This copies the PAKnote on the clipboard to await pasting.
3. Press Ctrl+V. This copies the PAKnote to the base map or VSD.
4. To associate the PAKnote to an object, choose one of the following options:
• move the anchor using the mouse:
- Select the copy of the PAKnote.
- Move the cursor (not the PAKnote) to the anchor point until the cursor changes to
an anchor.
- Click and drag the anchor to the object to associate the PAKnote to. The
Associated PAKnote With dialog box opens after you release the mouse button.
- Select the object and click OK. The anchor position moves.
• move the anchor using the PAKnotes Management dialog box:
- Right-click the copy of the PAKnote.
- Choose PAKnote > Properties. The PAKnotes Management dialog box opens.
- Click Associate. The cursor changes to an anchor.
- Click the object to associate the PAKnote to. The Associate PAKnote With
dialog box opens.
- Select the object to associate the PAKnote to and click OK. The PAKnotes
Management dialog box reappears.
- Click Apply to save the changes and leave the dialog box open, or click OK to
apply the changes and close the dialog box.

Coping a PAKnote on Project Explorer using the RMB menu

To copy a PAKnote on Project Explorer using the RMB menu, follow these steps:
1. Right-click a PAKnote on Project Explorer.
2. Choose Copy. The default name of Copy (n) of and the original PAKnote name, where n
is the copy number (not displayed if n = 1), appears. You can then change the name of
the PAKnote and reassociate it with an object. For more information on changing the
name, see Change the PAKnote name; for more information on changing the association,
see Change the anchor point for a PAKnote.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 255

PAKnote tasks

View PAKnotes
When you view PAKnotes, you can:
• Select and Deselect a PAKnote
• Hide and Open PAKnotes
• Create a working set
• Iconize and expand PAKnotes
• View PAKnote content
• Move a PAKnote without changing the anchor point
To display a limited version of the PAKnote context, pass the cursor over the PAKnote name
on the base map; the object icon, the PAKnote object, and the anchor point coordinates
appear.

Select and Deselect a PAKnote

Only one PAKnote can be selected at a time.
To select a PAKnote, click it; the PAKnote is outlined with eight small black squares called
nodes.
To deselect a PAKnote, click outside the PAKnote area.

Tip: To select a PAKnote that is outside the project bounds, use the View > Settings >
Margins tab to increase the viewable margin between the project bounds and the base
map or VSD.

Hide and Open PAKnotes

To hide a PAKnote, perform one of the following options:
• On Project Explorer, uncheck the box in front of the PAKnote.
• On the base map or VSD, right-click in the body of the PAKnote and choose Hide.
To turn a PAKnote back on (open a PAKnote), check the box in front of the PAKnote on
Project Explorer.

Create a working set

A project may contain 50 PAKnotes, but you may only want five PAKnotes to be displayed in
the base map or VSD at any given time.
To create a working set of PAKnotes, follow these steps:
1. On the Project Explorer, uncheck All PAKnotes.
2. Access the PAKnotes Management dialog box using one of the following methods:
• From The Kingdom software menu, click Project> PAKnotes Management. The
PAKnotes Management dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.

256 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

• Double click the PAKnotes folder in Project Explorer. The PAKnotes Management
dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.
• Right-click in the base map or VSD and choose PAKnotes Management.
The PAKnotes Management dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.

Note: You can also create a private PAKnote by right-clicking a borehole, formation top,
fault cut, grid, horizon, fault, survey, or point in the base map or the VSD and
choosing Create PAKnote > Web or Web Reference. For more information, see
Link to a Web Address Using the Create PAKnote > Web Option in Right Mouse
Button Menu.

3. Click the Display tab.

4. Select Display Working Set.

5. In Permissions, click either Private or Public.
6. In Select PAKnotes to Display, highlight the PAKnotes to be included in the working set
and click >. To select all PAKnotes, click >>.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 257

PAKnote tasks

Note: You can select more than one PAKnote by either holding down Shift and selecting
consecutive PAKnotes, or holding down Ctrl and selecting nonconsecutive
PAKnotes.

To deselect the PAKnotes in Display List, click <<. The PAKnotes appear in the
Select PAKnotes to Display.

To deselect one PAKnote, select the PAKnote(s) and click <.

7. Select the pointer behavior:

- Draw Pointer to Icon—turn on to offset either the icon or the expanded PAKnote
from the anchor point. The icon or the expanded PAKnote is connected to the anchor
by a straight line, which is the pointer line. This is the default.
- Draw Icon at Anchor—turn on to position the PAKnote directly over the anchor point.
When in the iconized state, no pointer is used. When in the expanded state, the
PAKnote is connected using the pointer line.
8. Click OK. Only the selected PAKnotes appear in the base map or VSD.

Iconize and expand PAKnotes

When you create a PAKnote, you can set whether or not the PAKnote appears as an icon or
in the expanded format.
To have an expanded PAKnote appear as an icon on the base map or VSD, right-click the
PAKnote and choose Iconize from the right mouse button menu. The PAKnote now appears
as an icon.
To have an iconized PAKnote appear in the expanded format on the base map or VSD,
double-click in the body of the icon. The PAKnote now appears in the expanded format.

View PAKnote content

To view the content of a PAKnote in the application in which it was created, follow these
steps:
• For expanded PAKnotes, double-click the body of the PAKnote.
• For iconized PAKnotes, double-click the icon to expand the PAKnote and then double-
click the body of the PAKnote.
The PAKnote opens in the application in which it was created. When the application is open,
you can edit the PAKnote and then save it using the application’s Save function. If the
PAKnote is linked to the source file, the changes are made in the source file. If the PAKnote is
imported (a copy of the source file), the changes are made in the copy, but not in the source
file.
Web-based PAKnotes open in your default Internet browser. You cannot edit web-based
PAKnotes.

258 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

Move a PAKnote without changing the anchor point

To move an iconized PAKnote or the body of an expanded PAKnote without changing the
anchor point, follow these steps:
1. Click the body of the PAKnote or icon and hold the left mouse button down.
2. Drag the PAKnote to a new location and release the left mouse button. The anchor point
remains fixed. Once set, a PAKnote stays fixed in its position relative to the object
position. If the PAKnote is present in another view, the PAKnote in the view will assume
the same final position, relative to the anchor point, upon button release. This is true
regardless of whether the PAKnote in the original view was in the selected state or not.

Update a PAKnote
When updating PAKnotes, you can:
• Change the PAKnote name
• Edit PAKnote content
• Select a Different File for the PAKnote
• Select a different web address for the PAKnote
• Change the permissions for a PAKnote
• Change the anchor point for a PAKnote
• Change the Display Style of a PAKnote
When updating PAKnotes, multiple PAKnotes may be edited at the same time. For example,
if three PAKnotes are selected, the PAKnote name, File Address, and PAKnote Location
and Association fields will be blank. The display properties may be changed all at once.

Change the PAKnote name

You can change the name of a PAKnote on the base map by using either the PAKnotes
Management dialog box or the right mouse button menu. You can also change the name of a
PAKnote on Project Explorer.

Rename a PAKnote using the PAKnotes Management dialog box

To change the PAKnote name, follow these steps:
1. Access the PAKnotes Management dialog box using one of the following methods:
• From The Kingdom software menu, click Project> PAKnotes Management.
• Double click the PAKnotes folder in Project Explorer. The PAKnotes Management
dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.
• Right-click in the base map or VSD and choose PAKnote Management.
The PAKnotes Management dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.
2. Click the Properties tab if it is not active.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 259

PAKnote tasks

Note: You can also right-mouse click a PAKnote and choose Properties from the right-
mouse-button menu.

3. In Select PAKnote(s), select the PAKnote whose name is to be changed. The fields are
populated with that PAKnote’s information.

Note: If you select more than one PAKnote, the Rename button is disabled.

4. Click Rename. The Rename PAKnote dialog box opens.

5. In To, enter the new name of the PAKnote. The name must be unique.
6. Click OK. The new name appears in PAKnote Name on the PAKnotes Management
dialog box.
7. Click Apply to save the change or OK to close the dialog box.
If you select another PAKnote before clicking Apply or OK after making changes to the
selected PAKnote, the following error message appears:

260 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

“You Have Changed the attributes of the selected PAKnotes, do you wish to retain
these changes. Click Yes to Apply Changes, No to Discard Them”.
Click Yes to apply the changes; click No to discard the changes.

Rename a PAKnote by selecting the title

To change the PAKnote name, follow these steps:
1. On the base map or VSD, click an expanded (non-iconized) PAKnote or double-click an
iconized PAKnote. If the PAKnote was iconized, it displays in the expanded state.
Figure 30 Base Map with expanded PAKnote selected

2. Double-click the displayed title. The Rename PAKnote dialog box opens.
3. In To, enter a new name and click OK.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 261

PAKnote tasks

Note: If the name cannot be seen, as with the Simple and Clear border styles, double-
click in the left hand corner of the note. Then follow the steps to edit the title. The
name will disappear when the editing is complete.

Rename a PAKnote on Project Explorer

To rename a PAKnote on Project Explorer, follow these steps:
1. Right-click a PAKnote on Project Explorer.
2. Choose Rename. The name is changed to an editable field.
3. Enter the new name.
4. Press Enter.

Edit PAKnote content

When you edit the content of a PAKnote, the application in which the PAKnote was created is
used. If you edit a linked file, the content in the source file is changed. If you edit copied
(imported) files, only the copy in the project is changed; the file the PAKnote was copied from
is not changed.

Note: The content for webpage PAKnotes cannot be modified through Kingdom.

To edit the content of a PAKnote, follow these steps:

1. On the base map or VSD, click an expanded (non-iconized) PAKnote or double-click an
iconized PAKnote. The PAKnote is highlighted and outlined with eight small black squares
called nodes. If the PAKnote was iconized, it displays in the expanded state.
2. Open the application that the PAKnote was created in and the source file using one of the
following methods:
• Double-click in the body of the PAKnote.The application in which the PAKnote was
created opens with the file displayed.
• Right click in the body of the PAKnote and choose Open or Open With. Open opens
the application that the PAKnote was created in and Open With opens the Open
With dialog box where you can choose an application in which to edit the PAKnote.
3. Update the PAKnote as needed.
4. Save the PAKnote using the application’s Save or Save As function. The changes appear
in the PAKnote.

Note: For external PAKnotes, if the Save function was used to save the PAKnote, that
PAKnote is placed back in the file’s home directory using the same file name. If
the Save As function was used to save the PAKnote, the edited PAKnote is placed
in the file’s home directory with the new name.

For internal PAKnotes, if the Save function was used to save the PAKnote, that
PAKnote is placed back in the PAKnotes folder. If the Save As function was used

262 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

to save the PAKnote, the edited internal PAKnote is saved with a new address and
name, depending on the user’s preference. The original PAKnote will still be in the
PAKnotes folder.

In the edited PAKnote shown in the figure below, all the wells after 17 were deleted in the
Excel spreadsheet.
Figure 31 Excel PAKnote after edit

Select a Different File for the PAKnote

Note: The file can only be changed for PAKnotes with linked files. If the source file is not
linked, the file cannot be changed.

To select a different file for the PAKnote name, follow these steps:
1. Select the Properties tab on the PAKnotes Management dialog box.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 263

PAKnote tasks

2. In Select PAKnote(s), select the PAKnote whose file is to be changed. The fields are
populated with that PAKnote’s information.

Note: If you select more than one PAKnote, the Browse button is disabled.

3. Click Browse. The Open dialog box opens.

4. Navigate to the new file and click Open. That file name appears in File Address in the
PAKnote Management dialog box.
5. Click Apply to save the change or OK to close the dialog box.

Select a different web address for the PAKnote

To select a different web address for the PAKnote name, follow these steps:
1. Select the Properties tab on the PAKnotes Management dialog box.
2. In Select PAKnote(s), select the PAKnote whose web address is to be changed. The
fields are populated with that PAKnote’s information.

Note: If you select more than one PAKnote, the Web button is disabled.

3. Click Web. The Link to Web dialog box dialog box opens.
Figure 32 Link to Web dialog box (from PAKnotes Management dialog box)

4. Select the web address as follows:

a. Click Launch Web Browser. The Internet browser window for your computer’s
designated browser opens.
b. Navigate to the web page to be used as the PAKnote.

264 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

c. In the Link to Web dialog box, click Refresh List to add the web address to the list.
d. Highlight the web address and click OK. The web address appears in the Web
Address field of the Create tab of the PAKnotes Management dialog box.

Tip: To add multiple titles and addresses to the List field, open multiple browsers. If you
change the web address in browser window that is already open and click Refresh List,
that web address will overwrite the web address shown in the list.

To remove website titles and addresses from the List field, delete the browser’s history.

Click Apply to save the change or OK to close the dialog box. If you select another PAKnote
before clicking Apply or OK after making changes to the selected PAKnote, the following
error message appears:
“You Have Changed the attributes of the selected PAKnotes, do you wish to retain
these changes. Click Yes to Apply Changes, No to Discard Them”.
Click Yes to apply the changes; click No to discard the changes.

Change the permissions for a PAKnote

To change the permissions for a PAKnote, follow these steps:
1. Select the Properties tab on the PAKnotes Management dialog box.
2. In Select PAKnote(s), select the PAKnote whose permissions are to be changed. The
fields are populated with that PAKnote’s information.

Note: You can select more than one PAKnote by either holding down Shift and selecting
consecutive PAKnotes, or holding down Ctrl and selecting nonconsecutive
PAKnotes.

3. Select one of the following permissions for PAKnote viewing and editing:
• Private—turn on to restrict viewing of the PAKnote to the original author
• Public—turn on to allow all authors to view and edit the PAKnote; only original
authors can re-associate or delete by the PAKnote
This selection persists as the default permission until the selection is changed. This
field does not dictate which PAKnotes are displayed in the Select PAKnote(s) field.
4. Click Apply to save the change or OK to close the dialog box.
If you select another PAKnote before clicking Apply or OK after making changes to the
selected PAKnote, the following error message appears:
“You Have Changed the attributes of the selected PAKnotes, do you wish to retain
these changes. Click Yes to Apply Changes, No to Discard Them”.
Click Yes to apply the changes; click No to discard the changes.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 265

PAKnote tasks

Change the anchor point for a PAKnote

When you create a PAKnote, you can associate it with an object on the base map or VSD by
using an anchor. You can change that anchor point by using either the PAKnotes
Management dialog box or the mouse.

Note: Only the original author may move a PAKnote’s anchor point.

Change the anchor point using the PAKnotes Management dialog box
To change the object association and anchor point for a PAKnote, follow these steps:
1. Select the Properties tab on the PAKnotes Management dialog box.
2. In Select PAKnote(s), select the PAKnote whose association is to be changed. The fields
are populated with that PAKnote’s information.

Note: You can select more than one PAKnote by either holding down Shift and selecting
consecutive PAKnotes, or holding down Ctrl and selecting nonconsecutive
PAKnotes.

3. Click Associate; on the base map or VSD, the cursor turns to an anchor .

Note: A base map or VSD must be active to use this feature.

4. Click the item to associate the PAKnote with; the Associateing PAKnotes with objects
dialog box appears.
5. Select the item to associate the PAKnote with.
6. Click OK. The name of the item appears in the PAKnote Location and Association
field.
7. Click Apply to save the change or OK to close the dialog box.
If you select another PAKnote before clicking Apply or OK after making changes to the
selected PAKnote, the following error message appears:
“You Have Changed the attributes of the selected PAKnotes, do you wish to retain
these changes. Click Yes to Apply Changes, No to Discard Them”.
Click Yes to apply the changes; click No to discard the changes.

Change the anchor point using the mouse

To change the object association and anchor point of a PAKnote, follow these steps:
1. Click the body of the PAKnote or icon.

2. Move the cursor to the anchor point; the cursor changes into an anchor .

266 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

Note: Do not hold the left mouse button down when moving the cursor. The cursor must be
exactly on top of the anchor point for the anchor to appear.

3. Drag the anchor point to the new location. The Associate PAKnote With dialog box
opens.
4. Select the new object and click OK.
The PAKnote name does not change, but the information in parentheses following the
name reflects any adjustments. For example, if the PAKnote is now positioned at a new
measured depth along the same borehole, then the new measured depth is displayed as
part of the name.

Change the Display Style of a PAKnote

To change the display style of a PAKnote, follow these steps:
1. Select the Properties tab on the PAKnotes Management dialog box.
2. In Select PAKnote(s), select the PAKnote whose style is to be changed. The fields are
populated with that PAKnote’s information.

Note: You can select more than one PAKnote by either holding down Shift and selecting
consecutive PAKnotes, or holding down Ctrl and selecting nonconsecutive
PAKnotes.

3. In Display Properties, select the following options to update the display style for the
PAKnote.
• Border Style—turn on one of the border styles shown in Figure 8 through Figure 10.
• Line Color—select the line color to use to connect the PAKnote to the item. It is also
the color of the PAKnote’s frame.
• Show as Icon—check this box to show the PAKnote as an icon on the base map and
VSD, as shown in Figure 11. If the PAKnote is shown as an icon, it cannot be read.
When unchecked, the PAKnote is displayed in its expanded state. This field is
persistent, meaning it remembers the selection used during the prior PAKnote
creation.
• Icon Style—select one of the following options to select the style of icon used to
represent the PAKnote on Project Explorer, base map, and VSD:
- Object Icon—click to use the appropriate icon for the nine different types of
objects shown in Figure 1.
- Select Icon—click to use one of the 12 other icons shown in Figure 2.
4. Click Apply to save the change or OK to close the dialog box.
If you select another PAKnote before clicking Apply or OK after making changes to the
selected PAKnote, the following error message appears:
“You Have Changed the attributes of the selected PAKnotes, do you wish to retain
these changes. Click Yes to Apply Changes, No to Discard Them”.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 267

PAKnote tasks

Click Yes to apply the changes; click No to discard the changes.

Change the Size of an Expanded PAKnote

Note: Expanding the size of a PAKnote does not change the size of text in a text PAKnote.

To change the size of an expanded PAKnote, follow these steps:

1. Click the expanded PAKnote to activate the nodes.
2. Click one of the PAKnote’s nodes and hold the left mouse button down.
3. Drag the node to adjust the size of the object.
The top center node increases and decreases the size of the top of the PAKnote. The left
center node increases and decreases the size of the left of the PAKnote. The bottom
center node increases and decreases the size to the left of the PAKnote. The right center
node increases and decreases the size to the right of the PAKnote. The nodes in the
corners expand and decrease the PAKnote proportionally.
The anchor point for the PAKnote remains fixed.

Print PAKnotes
Both iconized and expanded PAKnotes may be printed through Presentation Plot.
Displayed expanded PAKnotes in base map or vertical display windows will be plotted at the
same scale as they appear in Print Preview.

268 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

The PAKnotes will not be further expanded with the plot.

Only the first page of the displayed PAKnote will be plotted.

Tip: Use PAKnotes to create and print an interpretation montage.

PAKnotes on the base map, VSD, and Project Explorer are also printable as a separate
document within the application state.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 269

PAKnote tasks

Delete a PAKnote
There are several methods for deleting a PAKnote:
• Delete a PAKnote directly from the Base Map, VSD, or Project Explorer
• Delete one or more PAKnotes using the PAKnote Management dialog box

Delete a PAKnote directly from the Base Map,

VSD, or Project Explorer
To delete a PAKnote from the base map, VSD, or Project Explorer, follow these steps:
1. Select the PAKnote on either the base map, VSD, or Project Explorer.
2. Use one of the following methods to start the delete operation:
• On the base map or VSD, press Delete.
• On the Project Explorer, right-click and choose Delete from the right mouse button
menu.
One of the following messages appears:
Figure 33 PAKnote deletion message from Base Map or VSD

Figure 34 PAKnote deletion message from Project Explorer

3. Click OK or Yes to complete the delete operation; otherwise, click Cancel or No to

abandon the delete operation.

270 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

Delete one or more PAKnotes using the PAKnote

Management dialog box
To delete a PAKnote using the PAKnote Project Management dialog box, follow these
steps:
1. Access the PAKnotes Management dialog box using one of the following methods:
• From The Kingdom software menu, click Project> PAKnotes Management.
• Double click the PAKnotes folder in the Project Explorer. The PAKnotes
Management dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.
• Right-click in the base map or VSD and choose PAKnote Management.
The PAKnotes Management dialog box opens with the last tab used on top.
2. Click the Delete tab if it is not active.

3. In Permissions, select the type of PAKnotes to be deleted, either private or public.

4. In Select PAKnotes To Delete, select the PAKnotes to be deleted.
5. Click >. The PAKnotes are moved to PAKnotes To Be Deleted.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 271

PAKnote tasks

Note: You can also use Search to search for PAKnotes.

6. Click Apply.
A PAKnote deletion message appears:
“You are about to delete a PAKnote(s) on the delete list. This operation is
irreversible”.
7. Click OK to complete the delete operation or Cancel to abandon the delete operation.

Convert or delete a PAKnote whose

associated object has been deleted
When you delete an object that has a PAKnote associated with it from the base map, a
Warning dialog box opens. You can either then convert the PAKnote to a Project Explorer
note or delete the PAKnote. When you convert a PAKnote to a Project Explorer note, they
become context-less and do not appear on the base map or VSD; they only appear in the
Project Explorer. Context-less PAKnotes can still be viewed in the application in which they
were created.
Follow these steps to convert or delete the PAKnote to a Project Explorer Note.
Figure 35 Warning dialog box for Deleted Object with Associated PAKnote

1. Select the PAKnote(s) to be deleted:

272 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 PAKnote tasks

Note: If you want to convert all the PAKnotes, do not select any PAKnotes.

• To select one PAKnote, highlight that PAKnote.

• To select sequential PAKnotes, hold down Shift and select the first and last
PAKnotes; the first and last PAKnotes and all PAKnotes in between are selected.
• To select nonsequential PAKnotes, hold down Ctrl and select the PAKnotes.
• To select all PAKnotes listed, click All.
2. Click OK. The PAKnote(s) that were selected are deleted, while the PAKnotes that were
not selected are converted to Project Explorer notes.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 273

PAKnote tasks

274 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Printing and Plotting Options
With the correct information and permissions, print jobs should execute smoothly and
efficiently. To expedite the print process, make sure you have the correct file name, file path,
and printer path. Kingdom offers several print/plot features:

Quick Plot Create fast-scaled plots of both map and vertical windows.

Presentation Plot Create high quality plots of nearly any size and scale of base
map, vertical displays, synthetics, and RasterLogs.

Print Existing RTL File Plot directly to HP DesignJet series plotters

Select the appropriate print option and configure the Print setup: paper size and source,
document orientation, and printer properties.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 275

Print setup

Print setup
From the Kingdom main window menu bar, click Map > Print Setup or Line > Print Setup to
set the printing options. The Print Setup dialog provides options related to the default
Windows printer identified by the user.

Note: The Print Setup dialog box is a Windows dialog box. A list of available printers is
displayed in the field labeled “Name” Click the down arrow for the drop-down list. The
printer features are specific to the selected printer.

• Printer—select from the list of printer devices available on your system. If Adobe Acrobat
has been installed on your system, the Adobe PDF distiller should be available and can
be used to create a PDF file of the active window.After the printer or device driver is
selected, the status, type, and location are displayed.
• Properties—edit the setup, features, advanced features, scaling, paper type, and get
information on the related services.
• Paper—select the size and the source. Click the down arrow to display the list of
available sizes and sources.
• Orientation—set the direction of the print on the page. You can switch between portrait
(vertical) and landscape (horizontal).
• Network—connect to the appropriate printer on your company network using the
Connect to Printer dialog box. Locate the printer then click OK to complete the step and
close the dialog box.

Tip: Once you select the type of printer or plotter from the Print Setup dialog box, click
Properties to display the associated Details, Options, Fonts, Colors, Paper Options,

276 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Print setup

Paper Orientation, and Scaling Options. Each printer or plotter will have its’ own unique
set of options.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 277

Quick Plot

Quick Plot
From the Kingdom main window menu bar, click Map > Quick Plot or Line > Quick Plot.
Quick Plot is used to create fast-scaled plots and is available in both map and vertical
windows. It offers a quick way to generate scaled plots of active interpretation windows. It is a
bitmap process, similar to a screen dump. The active interpretation window controls the plot
limits and scale.

Tip: The Quick Plot keyboard shortcut is Ctrl+Q.

Dialog box items include:

• Name—set the name of the printer the images will be sent to.
• Properties—set basic printer parameters, such as page size and plot orientation. It is a
standard Windows feature.

Tip: Once you select the type of printer or plotter from the Print Setup dialog box, click the
Properties button to display the associated Details, Options, Fonts, Colors, Paper
Options, Paper Orientation and Scaling Options. Each printer or plotter will have its’ own
unique set of options.

Status, Type, Where and Comments are read only displays summarizing printer
properties.

278 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Quick Plot

• Title—enter the text that will be displayed in the first of two title lines that will appear in
the top center of the plot.
• Scaling Options—option include Display Scale and Stretch to page. The Display
Scale causes the plot to be printed at the scale set in the active interpretation window;
and Stretch to Page stretches the plot to fit entirely within the page defined in the printer
properties.
• Quality—choose between the highest quality possible, the lowest possible or somewhere
in between. Some printers contain several quality modes that require less ink. Naturally,
plot quality will suffer some.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 279

Presentation Plot

Presentation Plot
Access to the Presentation Plot dialog box depends on which Kingdom window is active:

Active Window Menu Selection

Base map Map > Presentation Plot

Vertical section (seismic or geologic) Line > Presentation Plot

Synthetic window Synthetic > Presentation Plot

Raster Log Editor RasterLog > Presentation Plot

Tip: Keyboard shortcut = Ctrl+P.

The Presentation Plot dialog box provides options to create high quality plots of nearly any
size and scale using a vector process mapping method for near perfect plots. The available
printing options depend on the window you are trying to print. The base map has the most
options and RasterLog has the fewest.

Plotting WMS Culture Layers

If the map you are printing has a Web Map Service layer displayed, then only the original
window content will print. To print the entire base map, you will need to zoom out until the
base map displays the full extents.
If your WMS image does not plot, check that the default height and width of the WMS Server
is sufficient for the plot size.

Presentation Plot Settings

The following figure is the Presentation Plot dialog box opened from an active base map:

280 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Presentation Plot

The Presentation Plot dialog box provides the following options and settings:

Data Extents Original Window Content—plots the extents of the active interpretation
window.
Specify Range. Specify an X/Y range for a base map window, or a line/
trace range for a Vertical Seismic Display (VSD) window.
Complete Figure—select to plot the entire base map or Vertical Seismic
Display (VSD) window.

Print Range Select the desired option to print All pages or a specified range of pages.
Presentation plot supports paneled plotting. Plot jobs that are larger then
the printer page size will be automatically paneled. Each plot panel will
contain 10% overlap and guide marks to assist in splicing the image
together. Large plots can be paneled and plotted on small page printers.
Fit to Page—scale and proportions change to allow the entire plot to fit
onto one page. This option disables the Specify Scale option.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 281

Presentation Plot

DirectPlot No longer supported.

Print to a Meta File Reroutes the plot job from the printer to a Windows Metafile, which is
stored on disk. The CGM options are used for exporting only.

CGM and CGM+ For HP DesignJet Plotters. CGM and CGM+ provide options for making
large-scale plots without memory restrictions.

Setup Base Map Select a color from the color palette for the base map background.
background color

Transparency There are 3 transparency display options:

• Opaque—make all display objects that have a transparency option
opaque in the output, even if the object’s display setting in the vertical
display or base map is not set to opaque.
• Transparent—honor the current transparency setting of all displayed
objects.
The Opaque and Transparent options create vector images for the output.
Text in vector images can be edited in the output PDF with the appropriate
editing software.
• Raster image—print the map or vertical section as a raster image. With
this option, the file size is larger and the text in the PDF output cannot
be edited.

Setup Specify print setup properties and parameters such as page size and plot
orientation.

Print Preview View the plot before printing.

Specify Scale Specify the scale and coordinate labels. The program defaults to the
Settings dialog boxes for the active interpretation window (VSD or base
map).

Specify Margins Enter a value in inches for the 4 margins of your presentation plot.

Title Block Enter title block properties.

Title block/Legend Provides options about where to print the Title Block and Legend.
position

North Arrow Specify how and where to print the north arrow symbol on the printed
base map.

Legend Select from a list of available legends.

Additional Print Select additional items to print: Frame, User ID, Date and time, Map scale
Options bar, Map projection info., Color mixing in polygons, and Transparency.

282 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Presentation Plot

Select data extent to print

In the Presentation Plot dialog box under Data Extents (base map, VSD and SynPAK
windows) select the Specify Range option to specify the extents of the plot.
• Select Data Extent to Print - map display—specify an X/Y or line/trace range.
• Select Data Extent To Print - Vertical Display—specify the line and time or depth range.

Select Data Extent to Print - map display

Note: A base map window must be active to use this feature.

From the Kingdom main window menu bar, click Map > Presentation Plot to activate the
Presentation Plot dialog box. Click the Specify Range button to activate the Select Data
Extent To Print dialog box for base map windows.
The Select Data Extent to Print dialog box controls the data extents of the plot.
The default is the plot bounds of the active base map window.
An X/Y or an in-line/crossline range defines the base map plotting extents.
Figure 1 Select Data Extent To Print dialog box for base maps, X/Y range.

Figure 2 Select Data Extent To Print dialog box for base maps, in-line/crossline range.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 283

Presentation Plot

Dialog box items include:

• Specify XY range limits the plot based on X and Y values.
• Start X lists the smallest X value within the active base map window.
• End X lists the largest X value within the active base map window.
• Start Y lists the smallest Y value within the active base map window.
• End Y lists the largest Y value within the active base map window.
• Specify line/trace range limits the plot based on in-line and crossline values.
• 3D Survey lists the available 3D surveys in the working set. Use the down arrow to select
a 3D survey.
• Start Line lists the smallest in-line value within the active base map window.
• End Line lists the largest in-line value within the active base map window.
• Start Trace lists the smallest crossline value within the active base map window.
• End Trace lists the largest crossline value within the active base map window.

Note: The range may be edited using the keyboard as desired.

• Print Type is a display only field, which is controlled by the active window.
• Window Content displays the data range of the data within the base map window.
• Complete Figure displays the range of the data within the project bounds.

Select Data Extent To Print - Vertical Display

Note: A vertical window must be active to use this feature.

From the Kingdom main window menu bar, click Line > Presentation Plot to activate the
Presentation Plot dialog box. Click the Specify Range button to activate the Select Data
Extent To Print dialog box for vertical windows.

284 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Presentation Plot

The Select Data Extent to Print dialog box controls the data extents of the plot.
The default is the plot bounds of the active vertical window.
A time and trace interval defines the vertical window plotting extents.

Dialog box items include:

• Start Line or Trace lists the smallest trace value within the active vertical window.
• End Line or Trace lists the largest trace value within the active vertical window.
• Start Time or Depth lists the smallest Z value within the active vertical window.
• End Time or Depth lists the largest Z value within the active vertical window.

Note: The range may be edited using the keyboard as desired.

• Print Type is a display only field, which is controlled by the active window.
• Window Content displays the data range of the data within the vertical window.
• Complete Figure displays the range of the data within the project bounds.

Base Map background color

Note: A base map window must be active to use this feature.

From the Kingdom main window menu bar, click Map > Presentation Plot to activate the
Presentation Plot dialog box. Click the Setup Base Map Background Color button to
activate the Color dialog box for presentation plot.
The Color dialog box offers a selection for the base map background.
Click a color from the color palette. The default is white.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 285

Presentation Plot

Print to a Meta File

From the Kingdom main window menu bar, click Map > Presentation Plot or Line >
Presentation Plot to activate the Presentation Plot dialog box. Check Print to Meta File to
enable the metafile features.
Metafiles are standardized file formats used for plotting graphic images. Meta file types
include EMF, CGM, and CGM+.
• EMF, or Enhanced Metafile, is an industry standard file format for plotting scaled
Windows images.
• CGM and CGM+
- CGM, or Computer Graphics Metafile, use oil and gas industry standards for
plotting scaled geoscience images. Geoscience images are commonly more detailed
than ordinary Windows images.
- CGM+ is an extension to CGM, designed to support the needs of plotting seismic
traces when applied to vertical windows. The CGM+ format may also be used to plot
grids and fault surfaces in base map windows.

CGM and CGM+

The CGM option consists of several graphics applications that read graphic elements in a file,
and then draws them on a computer screen or prints them to a plotter. High quality images
are scaled to any dimension because lines are drawn as individual graphics elements.
CGM only exports images as metafiles (EMF, CGM, and CGM+). The viewing and plotting
must be done with the aid of third party applications such as Larson Software Technology
(www.cgmlarson.com), or other CGM/CGM+vendors. Additionally, seismic and map displays
may be exported as EMF and CGM files. CGM+ is used for seismic displays in vertical
windows, and may also be used to print out grids and fault surfaces in base map windows.
CGM stands for Computer Graphics Metafile. This is a non-proprietary metafile format
supported by an international standards body. The metafile has been designed to be
extensive to support the specialized needs of various groups such as the oil industry.

286 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Presentation Plot

Note: Enhanced Metafile (EMF), Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) and Computer
Graphic Metafile+ (CGM+) are all standardized file formats for sharing graphics
images.

Note: EMF is an industry standard file format for sharing scalable Windows images.

• CGM and CGM+ are oil and gas standards for sharing scalable geoscience images.
Geoscience images are commonly more detailed than ordinary Windows images. CGM is
widely used across many areas including the oil industry.
• CGM+ is an extension to the standard designed to support the needs of seismic plotting
(traces). CGM+ is designed for oil industry. This applies to vertical windows. CGM+
format may also be used to print out grids and fault surfaces in base map windows.

CGM features
• CGM images are portable between UNIX and Windows.
• Popular applications like Microsoft Word (word processor) and Lotus Freelance (slide
presentations) support CGM. The resolution of text remains intact even at a very large
display scale.
• CGM+ is CGM with seismic traces (vertical windows), as well as grids and fault surfaces
(base map windows) as additional graphic objects.
• CGM+ files are more compact and scalable than CGM files because traces are stored in
a binary format similar to SEG-Y files. Since these files are smaller, transmission across
networks and the web is faster.
• Because seismic traces in CGM+ files are in a raw format, the user can choose the type
of seismic section display at the time the image is rendered. Users also have control over
colorbars, drawing resolution and other aspects of the display with the use of proper third
party software.
• Three major software vendors support CGM+ files/formats for rendering images on the
screen and plotters.

Terminology
• WMF stands for Windows Metafile (Microsoft).
• EMF stands for Enhanced Metafile (Microsoft).
• CGM stands for Computer Graphics Metafile.
• CGM+ stands for CGM file with an extension to the standard, which is designed to
support the needs of seismic plotting (traces). It may also be used to plot grids and fault
surfaces in base map windows.

Title Block
From the Kingdom main window menu bar, click Map > Presentation Plot or
Line>Presentation Plot, to activate the Presentation Plot dialog box. Check Title Block
and click the Title Block button to activate the Title Block dialog box.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 287

Presentation Plot

The Title Block dialog box displays information about the plot.
Information and images can be added and modified as needed.
The dialog box is same for both base map and vertical windows.

Dialog box items include:

• Company Name displays the name of the company. The default is Seismic Micro-
Technology, Inc. Enter a company name using the keyboard. Click [...] to specify the Text
attributes.
• Logo File displays a selected logo. Click […] to navigate to the image file containing the
logo.The logo is displayed next to the Company Name.
• Logo Position determines the placement of the logo. Click Left or Right to select a
location next to the Company Name.
• Project Title displays the name of the opened project. Click [...] to specify the Text
attributes.
• Project Location displays the location of the active project. This can be geographical
location, file location, etc. Click [...] to specify the Text attributes.
• Background Color displays the background color for the title block. Use the down arrow
to select a color from the color palette.

288 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Presentation Plot

• Map Scale Bar Height (base map windows) adjusts the scale bar height in annotation
units. Click [...] to specify the Text attributes.
• Comment provides a field to enter descriptive text. It defaults to the title of the active
window Click [...] to specify the Text attributes..
Justification aligns the Comment text. Choose either Left or Center justification.
• Title Block Width sets the width of the title block in annotation units
.

Text attributes
From the Kingdom main window menu bar, click Map > Presentation Plot or Line >
Presentation Plot, to activate the Presentation Plot dialog box. Check Title Block and click
the Title Block button to activate the Title Block dialog box. Click the …] button for
Company Name, Project Title, Project Location, or Comment to activate the Text
Attributes dialog box.
The Text Attribute dialog box sets the color, weight, and size of the title block text.

Dialog box items include:

• Color selects the text color for the labels. The default is black. Use the down arrow to
select a color from the color palette.
• Weight adjusts the boldness of the text labels. Use the down arrow to select a weight.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 289

Presentation Plot

• Size adjusts the size of the text labels in annotation units. Enter a size using the keyboard
if desired.

Note: A value less than or equal to 1.0 inch (or 2.5 centimeters) is an absolute size. A
value greater than 1.0 inch (or 2.5 centimeters) is in map units and is a relative
size. The relative size estimate will appear under the Size field.

North Arrow
Note: A base map window must be active to use this feature.

From the Kingdom main window menu bar, click Map > Presentation Plot to activate the
Presentation Plot dialog box. Check North Arrow and click the North Arrow button to
activate the North Arrow dialog box.
The North Arrow dialog box edits the north arrow that will be posted on the plot if this item is
checked. If unchecked, the north arrow will not be plotted.

Dialog box items include:

• Arrow Attributes set the colors and length of the arrow.
- Left Side Color selects the text color for the arrow’s left triangle. The default is red.
Use the down arrow to select a color from the color palette.
- Right Side Color selects the text color for the arrow’s right triangle. The default is
red. Use the down arrow to select a color from the color palette.
- Length adjusts the length of the arrow in annotation units. Enter a size using the
keyboard if desired.
• ‘N’ Text Attributes sets the color, size, and weight of the label portion of the north arrow.

290 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Presentation Plot

- Color selects the text color for the label. The default is black. Use the down arrow to
select a color from the color palette.
- Size adjusts the size of the text labels in annotation units. Enter a size using the
keyboard if desired.
- Weight adjusts the boldness of the text labels. Use the down arrow to select a weight.

Select Legend
From the Kingdom main window menu bar, click Map > Presentation Plot or Line >
Presentation Plot, to activate the Presentation Plot dialog box. Check on Legend option and
click the Legend button to activate the Select Legend dialog box.
The Select Legend dialog box lists the possible legends that will be posted on the plot if
checked. If unchecked, the legend(s) will not be plotted.

Dialog box items include:

• Please select the legends to print lists all the legends available for the active window.
Click a legend name to select it for printing.
There are several legends that can be viewed on the plot:
• Well Symbol (base map windows) is based on the working set selection of wells from the
Select Wells to Display dialog box.
• Well Data Post (base map windows) is based on selections from the Post data tab of the
Post Data on Map dialog box.
• Grid (base map windows) is available if a grid is displayed on the base map window.
• Contour (base map windows) is available if a contour map is displayed on the base map
window.
• Colorbar is available if a color bar is displayed on the active window. This legend is based
on the color bar selection from the Color Bar menu of the Color Editor dialog box.
With a Geology main module license, these legends are also available:

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 291

Presentation Plot

• Formation Tops (cross-section windows) is based on the working set selections from the
Display tab of the Formation Tops Management dialog box.
• Completion and Testing (cross-section windows) is based on selections from the Show
Test Intervals dialog box.
• Log Curve Constant Shading (cross-section windows) is based on constant shading
selections from the Shading tab of the Log Settings dialog box.
• Log Curve Facies Shading (cross-section windows) is based on facies shading selections
from the Shading tab of the Log Settings dialog box.
• Log Curve Crossover Shading Colorbar (cross-section windows) is based on crossover
shading selections from the Shading tab of the Log Settings dialog box.
• Attribute Bubble Map (base map windows) is based on selections from the
Attribute Map tab of the Post Data on Map dialog box.
• Bubble Map Colorbar (base map windows) is based on selections from the Bubble
Map tab of the Post Data on Map dialog box.
• Bubble Map (Multi-Attribute) (base map windows) is based on selections from the
Bubble Map tab of the Post Data on Map dialog box.
• Index Map (All Wells) (cross-sections) displays a diagram of all the project wells, and
the cross-section’s path through the wells.
• Index Map (Wells in Working Set) (cross-sections) displays a diagram of the working
set of wells, and the cross-section’s path through the wells.

Note: If both the Index Map (All Wells) and the Index Map (Working Set of Wells) are
selected, then Index Map (All Wells) is what will display in the Presentation Plot.

• All button selects all of the legends in the list.

Note: You can select more than one legend by either holding down Shift and selecting
consecutive legends, or holding down Ctrl and selecting nonconsecutive legends.

• None button deselects all previously selected legends.

Specify Margins
From the Kingdom main window menu bar, choose Map > Presentation Plot or Line >
Presentation Plot, to open the Presentation Plot dialog box. In the Presentation Plot
dialog box, click Specify Margins to open the Specify Margins dialog box.
The Specify Margins dialog box allows you to adjust the distance between the plot image
and the surrounding border or Left, Right, Top, and Bottom margins.
The Specify Margins dialog box contains the following elements:
• Specify Margins in (unit of measurement)—enter values for margins provide fields to input
the values for the margins in annotation units for the active display window.margins
provide fields to the margins in annotation units.
- Left—enter (type) a value for the left margin.

292 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Presentation Plot

- Right—enter (type) a value for the right margin.

- Top—enter (type) a value for the top margin.
- Bottom—enter (type) a value for the bottom margin.

Color mixing in polygons

This Presentation Plot option displays the color inside a polygon (culture shapes and
planimeter polygons) as a combination of the fill color and background color selected for the
displayed raster image. Color mixing is used when printing a polygon with a fill pattern other
than solid or blank.
See also Tools > Polygon Management > Properties.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 293

Print Existing RTL File

Print Existing RTL File

RTL (Raster Transfer Language) files are created with DirectPLOT, a printing option no
longer supported. However, you can still print existing RTL files. From the Kingdom main
window menu bar, click the top left menu option: Map with the base map active, and Line with
a vertical display active. Select Print Existing RTL File.

294 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Horizon Conversion
Horizon conversion from Pre-8.0 Kingdom
The horizon file format was changed in Kingdom version 8.0 to a tiled format. Untiled
horizons cannot be used in Kingdom versions 8.0 and later. If opening a pre-8.0 project in a
later version, all horizons must first be converted to the tiled format.

Note: Tiled horizons are not available in pre-8.0 versions of Kingdom software. If horizons
must be taken from Kingdom 8.0 to an earlier version of the software, the horizons
must be exported from Kingdom 8.0 and imported into the earlier version of the
software.

The Horizon Conversion wizard opens automatically if you have any untiled horizons.

Dialog box items include:

• Convert Horizons to Tiled Format—a message explains the necessity to convert
horizons.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 295

• Horizon Conversion Summary—displays the number of horizons requiring conversion,
estimated disk space requirements, and estimated conversion time.
• FAQ—click to access a list of frequently asked questions about tiling horizons.
• Convert—click to start the operations to convert horizons to the tiled format. The horizon
conversion process begins, and the temporary status message appears.

Note: To cancel the conversion, click Cancel. The following message appears

Click Yes to abort the conversion or click No to convert the horizons.

If you cancel the conversion, the Horizon Conversion wizard appears the next
time the project is opened. All horizons must be converted for the logged-in author
before the project will open.

296 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

• Status—the status bar of the conversion of untiled horizons to tiled horizons.
- No. Horizons Selected—the number of untiled horizons selected.
- No. Horizons Converted—the progress of the number of horizons converted to tiled
format.

Note: After horizon conversion is started, it must be allowed to complete. If, for some
reason, the process is stopped before completion (power failure, for example),
then the next time the project is entered, the Horizon Conversion wizard will
again be presented. All horizons must be converted for the logged-in author
before the project will open.

After the horizon tiling conversion process is complete, the Horizon Conversion Results
dialog box appears, showing the results of the conversion.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 297

• Horizon Conversion Results
- Number of horizons requiring conversion—displays the number of horizons that
will be converted or tiled.
- Number of horizons converted—displays the number of horizons that were
converted or tiled during the conversion operation.
- Size of original untiled horizon tiles—displays in Mega Bytes the size of the file
containing the untiled horizons.
- Size of converted tiled horizon files—displays in Mega Bytes the size of the file
containing the tiled horizons.
- Horizon conversion time—time required to have completed the horizon conversion
operation.
• Finish—click to close the Horizon Conversion Results dialog box and open the project.

298 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Tiled Horizons FAQ

Tiled Horizons FAQ

1. What is the Horizon Conversion process?
The horizon file format has been changed for Kingdom 8.0 and subsequent versions.
Horizons are now stored in a tiled format. Untiled horizons may not be used in Kingdom
8.x versions. All horizons must be converted before a project may be opened in Kingdom
8.x. The Horizon Conversion wizard opens automatically if you have any untiled
horizons and allows you to convert the horizons to the new format.
2. Can I open a project in Kingdom 8.x without converting my horizons?
No. The horizon conversion process must be allowed to complete before you can open
the project in Kingdom 8.x
3. Can I abort the conversion process after it has started?
No. After it has started, the horizon conversion must be allowed to complete. If, for some
reason, the process is stopped before completion (power failure, for example), then the
next time the project is entered, the Horizon Conversion wizard will again be presented.
All horizons must be converted for the logged in author before the project will open.
4. What does the conversion process do?
The Horizon Conversion wizard allows you to convert all horizons to the new format for
the logged in author only. The new horizons will have the extension .HZN. Copies of the
horizons will be retained in the old format, and will retain the horizon file extension .HRZ.
Following the conversion process, there will be two copies of each horizon—one in tiled
format (.HZN), and the other in the original, untiled format (.HRZ).
5. Can I delete the horizon files in the old .HRZ format?
Yes. If it is determined that the old horizon files are no longer needed, they may be
manually moved, deleted, or archived. Kingdom 8.x will only require the new .HZN files.
6. If I delete a converted horizon in Kingdom 8.x, will it delete both the new .HZN and old
.HRZ files?
Yes. When a converted horizon is deleted from within Kingdom 8.x, the horizon entry is
removed from the database and both old and new format horizon files are deleted.
7. Are tiled horizons compatible with pre-8.0 versions of Kingdom?
No. Tiled horizons will not be available for use in pre-8.0 versions of Kingdom. If horizons
must be taken from Kingdom 8.x to an earlier version of the software, the horizons must
be exported from Kingdom 8.x and imported into the earlier version of the software.
8. Will I be able to view untiled horizons of other authors in Kingdom 8.x?
No. The other authors must open the project in Kingdom 8.x and convert their horizons to
the new format in order for them to be viewed by other authors in Kingdom 8.x.
9. My project contains only 2D surveys. Will my horizon files be converted?
Yes. The horizon file structure is designed to accommodate horizon data for both 2D and
3D surveys. Even though 2D surveys are not directly affected by tiled horizons, the format
of the horizon file must still be changed.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 299

Tiled Horizons FAQ

10. What are “tiled horizons?”

The term “tiled horizons” refers to a new format for storing horizon data. In pre-8.0
versions of Kingdom, if a horizon was created for a 3D survey, then the horizon file was
created large enough to accommodate a value for every trace in the survey, even if the
horizon was interpreted on only one trace (see the figure below). The tiled horizon format
creates space for the horizon interpretation in “tiles”. The tiles are of dimensions 128x128
“bins”, with one bin per trace. In Kingdom 8.x, if a horizon is interpreted on only one trace
of a 3D survey, space will be allocated for only one tile, rather than the entire survey (see
Figure 2 below).
Figure 1 If the horizon is interpreted on the trace at Inline 1, Crossline 1, then the horizon file covers the
entire survey (gray area)

Figure 2 If the horizon is interpreted on the trace at Inline 1, Crossline 1, then the horizon file covers only
one tile (gray area)

11. What are the benefits of tiled horizons?

The main benefit of the tiled horizon format is in improved performance. This performance
improvement is realized due to a) reduced file size, and b) more efficient data access and
allocation of memory.

300 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Tiled Horizons FAQ

Another benefit is reducing the file size. The tiled horizon format may reduce the size of
some horizon files significantly. A horizon interpreted in pre-8.0 versions of Kingdom for a
survey with 2500 Inlines and 1700 crosslines will require 18,062,500 bytes of disk space
per attribute. The space requirement is calculated by:
((# inlines)*(#crosslines)*4.25 bytes)*(# of attributes)
The 4.25 bytes are based on 4 bytes for each attribute, plus 2 bits to flag the pick as one
of the following: manual pick, auto pick, or no pick.
For our survey, the space requirement per attribute would be:
2500 * 1700 * 4.25 = 18,062,500 bytes
If only Inline 1 was interpreted for this survey in pre-8.0 versions of Kingdom, the resulting
horizon file would be 18,062,500 * 2 = 36,125,000 bytes. This horizon has two attributes:
time and the data type interpreted on.
In Kingdom 8.0 and subsequent versions, interpreting only Inline 1 on this survey would
result in horizon tiles being created only in the area interpreted. Horizon tiles are 128x128
bins, and Inline 1 contains 1700 crosslines (traces), so we need 14 horizon tiles to
accommodate the interpretation (14 * 128 = 1792). The figure below shows the tiles that
are created in this case (indicated by red shading).
Figure 3 Horizon tiling—reduced file size.

The horizon file size for this interpretation would be:

(traces/tile) * (# tiles) * 4.25 * (# attributes), or
(128 x 128) * 14 * 4.25 * 2 = 1,949,696 bytes
In this case, the tiled horizon file requires about 5.4% of the disk space required by the
pre-8.0 horizon file.
In Figure 3 the gray area indicates the 3D survey. The darker overlay lines show how
many tiles would be required to accommodate an interpretation that covers the entire
survey. Notice that there is some additional space required on the top and right edges of
the survey to cover the entire survey. This is due to the fact that partial horizon tiles are
not supported. This increase in total file size becomes negligible for larger surveys, and is

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 301

Tiled Horizons FAQ

more than offset by the benefits realized in horizon data access and memory usage, as
we will see in the next section.
Horizon Data Access and Memory Allocation
Tiled horizons offer significant advantages over untiled horizons in terms of the amount of
data read from the hard disk as well as in the amount of data loaded into memory.
With untiled horizons, when a horizon is interpreted in a vertical seismic display the entire
horizon must be read from disk and loaded into memory. If multiple horizons are
displayed and interpreted, the entire horizon file for each horizon must be read into
memory. With large surveys, the amount of horizon data being read from disk and stored
in memory can be quite large.
With tiled horizons, when a horizon is interpreted in a vertical seismic display, only those
tiles that lie on the traces displayed in the vertical seismic display are read from disk and
loaded into memory. For large 3D surveys, this can result in significant performance
improvements. It should be noted that the benefits of accessing significantly smaller
amounts of data are even greater when reading and writing files over a network.
One of the most significant advantages of tiled horizons is the more efficient use of
available memory. Even with tiled horizons, at times the entire horizon must be read into
memory. If the horizon is interpreted on an entire 3D survey, the tiled horizon file size is
equal to that of an untiled horizon. In the figure below, the bar represents memory
address space, with the red areas indicating allocated memory and the green areas
indicating unallocated, or “free”, memory.
Figure 4 Memory address space. Red = allocated memory. Green = unallocated memory.

In the figure below, the blue bar indicates the amount of memory required to
accommodate a horizon interpreted across an entire 3D survey. Let’s say that the
memory required is 100 MB. This is an untiled horizon, which means that it requires 100
MB of contiguous memory address space. It is clear that there is not a green area large
enough to accommodate the blue bar. Even though the available memory (green area)
exceeds 100 MB, there is not 100 MB of contiguous memory available, and the
application will respond with an “Out of memory” message.
Figure 5 Untiled horizon. Blue bar = amount of contiguous memory required to accommodate an untiled
horizon.

Now let’s look at this situation using a tiled horizon. The figure below shows a tiled
horizon of 100 MB total size (blue bar), and how the available memory can be efficiently
allocated to accommodate the tiled horizon. In this case we do not require 100 MB of

302 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

 Tiled Horizons FAQ

contiguous memory because the smaller tiles can be spread over much smaller
segments of contiguous memory.
Figure 6 Tiled horizon allocated to memory.

12. What if my project must be opened in a pre-8.0 version of Kingdom after my horizons are
converted to the tiled format?
If you have converted your project to Kingdom 8.x and return to an earlier version of the
software, the pre-8.0 version will only see the original .HRZ files. If a tiled horizon has
been created in 8.x (and did not exist in 7.x), then an empty .HRZ file will be created for
that horizon. The original .HRZ files will not be current – any interpretation done in
Kingdom 8.x will not be seen in the .HRZ horizons. For this reason all horizons must be
exported from Kingdom 8.x and imported in the pre-8.0 version.
If you then interpret horizons in pre-8.0 versions of Kingdom and then move forward
again to Kingdom 8.x, you must manually delete any .HZN files before doing so. This will
initialize the horizon conversion process again and the .HRZ files will be upgraded to the
.HZN tiled format.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 303

Tiled Horizons FAQ

304 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.